P06 03 ELEC - Compressed

PHILIPPINE GENERAL HOSPITAL
VARIOUS PROJECTS – P06

Taft Avenue, Ermita, Manila, Philippines
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Prepared by: MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES, INC.

25F Chatham House
116 Valero cor. V.A. Rufino Sts
Salcedo Village, Makati City
1227 Philippines
12 July 2017
ALFREDO G. RODRIGUEZ
Professional Electrical Engineer
Reg. No. : 2633

PTR No. : 5913459
Date Issued : 05 January 2017
Issued at : Makati City
TIN No : 119-179-390
100% CD
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Section 16001 - Electrical Systems
2. Section 16007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers
3. Section 16010 - Electrical General Provisions
4. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
5. Section 16051 - Common Works Results for Electrical
6. Section 16055 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
7. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
8. Section 16071 - Fire Stopping for Electrical Works
9. Section 16074 - Electrical Equipment Noise Control,

Vibration, Isolation, and Seismic Restraints
10. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification
11. Section 16080 - Startup, Testing, and Commissioning of

Electrical Equipment
12. Section 16110 - Raceways and Boxes
13. Section 16120 - 600V Wire and Cable
14. Section 16135 - Isolated Power Systems
15. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
16. Section 16200 - Engine Generator Sets
17. Section 16211 - Electricity Metering
18. Section 16330 - Dry Type (Cast Resin) Power Transformer
19. Section 16410 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect

Switches
20. Section 16443 - Motor Control Center
21. Section 16470 - Panelboards
22. Section 16500 - Luminaires and Accessories
23. Section 16611 - Static UPS
24. Section 16950 - Testing and Commissioning
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Electrical Systems SECTION 16001
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................1

1.1 W ORK INCLUDED ..............................................................................................................................1
1.2 W ORK NOT INCLUDED .......................................................................................................................2
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS ..................................................................................................................2
1.4 CERTIFICATION AND APPROVALS.......................................................................................................2
1.5 W ORKMANSHIP .................................................................................................................................2
1.6 MATERIALS AND DEVICES..................................................................................................................2
1.7 GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY ......................................................................................2
1.8 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................3
1.9 AS-BUILT PLANS ...............................................................................................................................3
1.10 ACCEPTANCE OF THE W ORK .............................................................................................................3
1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING .................................................................................................................3

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100%
CD\P06\Electrical\16001-Electrical Systems.doc
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to supply and install the
complete electrical systems as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section
of the Specifications.
B. The work essentially shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited, to the following
items:
1. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission all the High Voltage

Switchboards,Power Transformers,Engine Generator Sets,Low Voltage
Swithcboards, UPS, Distribution Panel boards, Lighting & Power Panel boards,
including bolt-on type MCCB’s, Surge Diverters, enclosed circuit breakers
bracket/supports as per drawing & specification.
2. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission the new Distribution Panel (DP) main
cabling as per specification and drawings. Contractor to coordinate works with
trade contractors and include necessary accessories as required.
3. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission all sub-main cabling from new
distribution panels in the electrical room to all Clean Power, Lighting and
Power Panel boards as per specification and drawing.
4. Furnish Install, Test and Commission the complete final sub-circuit for lighting
and power points inclusive of switches, sockets, etc. as per specification and
drawing.
5. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission the lighting luminaires with lamp, control
gears, bracket/support as per specification and drawings.
6. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission all, Enclosed Circuit Breaker (ECB),
disconnect switches, etc. as per drawing and specifications.
7. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission Battery Packs in designated emergency
lighting luminaires (marked w/ B)as per drawing & specification.
8. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission the complete equipment grounding
system including grounding cables, labeling, tags, conduits, ground bus, etc.
as per specification & drawings.
9. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission the complete raceway system s for
Lighting, Power, Telecommunications and Auxiliary Systems, including
conduits, cable tray, cable trunking, clamps, supports, etc., as per
specifications and drawings.
10. Furnish, install, test and Commission the power supply cabling from the panel
boards to the control panels and roughing-ins of the Security System as per
drawings and specifications.
11. As a standard practice, it shall be understood that the final location of electrical
equipment, devices, and interconnections may be moved in the field by a
distance of 4.57 meters (15 ft.) from the location shown without extra cost,
provided such notice is given prior to installation.
12. Preparation of As-Built Drawings Test Reports, Operation and Maintenance
Manuals and Documents.
13. Coordinate with other trade contractors.
14. Provision of shop drawings suitable for submission to the local authority, as
built drawings.
15. Integrated Testing and Commissioning. The Contractor shall carry out an
integrated performance tests on the complete MEPF Systems to show that it is
functioning satisfactorily within the requirements of this specification. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of all site tests on the
Electrical System as required to certify the proper operation of the system as a
whole.
16. Liaison with local authority to obtain all necessary certificates and approvals
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 3

including the completion of all forms and payment of any fees and charges.
All costs for all the tests required by local authority shall be included.
17. Painting of electrical work (conduiting/roughing-ins/containment systems, etc.)
and equipment.
18. Preparation of Short Circuit Coordination Study of overcurrent protective
devices, conductors, and all electrical equipment by a Third Party Agency.
19. All other works and systems as specified in the contract document and/or
shown on the drawings.
1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED
The following principal items of work are not included in this Division of the specification, as they
will either be carried out under other Divisions of the specifications or will be supplied and
installed by others:
A. Incoming primary high voltage cables, metering, and accessories from MECO manhole
up to primary metering vault.
B. Civil works consisting of concrete pads of substation transformers, switchboards,

gensets, and other equipment.
C. Elevators, control equipment and accessories, except where specifically noted

otherwise.
D. Motors and controls for building utility equipment, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
E. Interlocking and control wiring and conduits for HVAC as specified under Division 15 –
Mechanical Works.
F. Power and control wiring from motor breaker-starters to motors.
G. Motor Control Centers (MCC).
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to the General Provisions.
1.4 CERTIFICATION AND APPROVALS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all technical submissions, applications and
liaison with the government departments and supply authorities, whether they are new
submissions or follow-up to previous submissions already made. The Contractor shall
be responsible for obtaining all the necessary approvals and certificates for his
installations and payments for his applications.
1.5 WORKMANSHIP
A. Shall be first class and in accordance with the best practices of the trade.
1.6 MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A. Only new materials and devices shall be installed on the job.
1.7 GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
A. Coordination of all sub-contractors is the responsibility of the General Contractor; work

to follow plans and specifications which are complementary to each other.

1.8 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The more stringent requirement shall prevail.
1.9 AS-BUILT PLANS
A. As construction progresses, the contractor shall indicate on the field copy of the
contract plans any and all deviations from originally drawn thereon. Upon completion
of the contract, these field corrections shall be incorporated on reproductible drawing
sheets of the system. The reproducible drawing sheets, including two (2) white print
copies, shall be submitted to the Owner(s) at no cost to the Owner(s).
1.10 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK
A. Shall be conditioned on a successful test of the entire system.
1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Owner representative reserves the right to inspect and witness at manufacturer’s
works test on any items of equipment or piping whichever the Owner representative
may select. The Contractor shall allow all testing facilities for this purpose.
B. The Contractor shall carry out all tests specified in this specification and all tests
required by Authorities having jurisdiction over the works. All tests shall be carried out
in the presence of the Owner representative or M&E Consultant.
C. All apparatus, instruments, equipment, materials and labour required for conducting
these tests and demonstration shall be provided at the cost of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall carry out all electrical tests on the complete Electrical System to show
that it is functioning satisfactorily within the requirements of this specification. Copies of
all test certificates shall be endorsed by the Client’s site staff and forwarded to the
Owner representative for his review.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers SECTION 16007
SECTION 16007
ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIERS
PART 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 The Stipulated Bid Sum shall be for base Specification equipment only. Where a choice of
base bid equipment is given, indicate selection included in Stipulated Bid Sum by submitting this
Section. Failure to complete and submit this section will indicate that the Contractor has
agreed to provide the base bid equipment specified in each specification section, listed in each
equipment schedule, and/or shown on the Drawings.
1.2 Submit the following list of base bid suppliers in accordance with Bid requirements.
Spec. Materials/ Base Bid Alternative Mfg.

Reference Equipment Manufacturer or Supplier Name
Section or Supplier
16055 Overcurrent Protective EDSA
Device Coordination ETAP
16060 Grounding and Bonding Cadweld

Erico
Eritech
Furse
Kumwell
16071 Firestopping for Electrical 3M

Works Hilti
Metacaulk
Promat
Rectorseal
Specseal
Tremco
16073 Hangers & Supports Grinnell Caddy

Hilti Erico
Myatt Hokki
Unistrut Superstrutt
Vibration Control for Mason Amber/Booth

Electrical Works VCS California Dynamics
Vibration Eliminator Kinetics Noise Control
VMC1 Sausse (Vibex)
Youil
Siesmic-Restraint Amber/Booth Kinetics Noise Control
Devices Cooper B-Line Inc.
16074 Flexible Connections Crouse-Hinds
Emergency Generator Cowl

Muffler Maxim
Nelson 400
Emergency Generator Industrial Acoustics

Noise Control Ovil Ensys

CD\P06\Electrical\16007-Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers.doc

Section or Supplier
16120 Conductors & Cables American Wire
Columbia
Phelps Dodge
Philflex
Fire Rated Cable Draka

Keystone
Lapp
Prysmian
Pyrotech
Sigma
Connectors and Splices 3M

Burndy
16124 Medium Voltage Cables Columbia

Far East
Phelps Dodge
Prysmian
HV Splice Kits, 3M
Connectors, etc. Burndy
ITT Blackburn
Nexan
Raychem
16130 Metallic Conduit and Allied

Tubing Matsushita/Panasonic
Smart Tube
Manhole Covers/Cast Crouse –Hinds Makati Foundry

Iron Boxes
Non-Metallic Conduit and Atlanta

Tubing Emerald
Moldex
Neltex
Flush Underfloor Duct Ackerman

Walker
Metallic Wireway Asiaphil,

(Local) Fuji-Haya Total Power
Box Electric
System Powermark
Versa Trunk
Boxes, Enclosures and Appleton

Cabinets Crouse-Hinds
Steel City

Spec. Materials/ Base Bid Alternative

Reference Equipment Manufacturer Mfg.
Section or Supplier or Supplier
Name
16140 Wiring Devices Clipsal

Legrand
MK
National/Panasonic
Toshiba
16145 Lighting Control ABB

Devices Clipsal
Lutron
Schneider
Watstopper
Zumtobel/Thorn
16211 Electricity Metering ABB

EDMI
EMH
Emon-Demony
GE
Schneider
Siemens
16215 Electrical Power ABB

Monitoring EDMI
EMH
Emon-Demony
GE
Landis Gyr
Schneider
Siemens
16231 Packaged Engine Engine Alternator

Generator System Caterpillar AVK
Cummins Caterpillar
Mitsubishi Kato
MTU Leroy- Sommer
Marathon
Stamford
16264 Static Uninterruptible UPS Battery
Power Supply Eaton C&D
Emerson Exide
GE
Liebert
MGE
Socomec
16271 Power Transformer Dry Type Less Flammable

liquid filled
ABB ABB
Cooper Cooper
GE SGB-Germany
Siemens
SGB-Germany
Ritz WTW
Trihal


Section or Supplier
16280 Power Factor Correction ABB
Equipment EPCOS
Nokia
Schneider
Siemens
16289 Transient Voltage Surge Altec
Suppression ASCO
GE
Simetaimer
16341 Medium Voltage ABB
Switchboards GE
Schneider
Siemens
Ormazabal
16410 Disconnect Switches ABB
OEMB
Siemens
16415 Transfer Switches ASCO
GE
Schneider
Zenitt
16430 Low Voltage ABB
Switchboards Schneider
Siemens
GE
16435 Paralleling Switchgear Circuit Controller
Breaker
ABB Cummins
GE InteliGen
Schneider Woodward
Siemens
16442 Panelboards ABB
GE
Schneider
Siemens
All distribution switchgear

(locally-assembled) shall be
from one of the following
manufacturers:
1. Asiaphil Manufacturing
Industries, Inc.
2. LJ Industrial
Fabrication, Inc.
3. Fuji-Haya Electric, Inc.
4. System Powermark
16443 Motor Control Center ABB

Schneider
Siemens
16450 Busducts GE
Schneider

Siemens

Reference Equipment Manufacturer or Supplier
Section or Supplier Name
16511 Interior Lighting Architectural BOH Area

(Fixture housing and Lighting
accessories) Beghelli Fumaco
Cooper Maxitech
Philips
Thorn
Electronic Ballast Philips

Thorn
Tridonic-Atco
Zumtobel
Lamp GE
Osram
Philips
Thorn
Toshiba
16521 Exterior Lighting Beghelli

Cooper
Philips
Thorn
Electronic Ballast Philips
Thorn
Tridonic-Atco
Zumtobel
Lamp GE
Osram
Philips
Thorn
16570 Lighting Control System Clipsal
Cooper
Lutron
16690 Lightning Protection System Conventional ESE
Erico EF Carrier
Furse Erico
Kumwell LPI
Pulsar
16691 Photo Voltaic Hitachi
Power System Newcore Industries
Schneider
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Electrical General Provisions SECTION 16010
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 W ORK INCLUDED .............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................ 2
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................... 3
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 4
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 4
1.6 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................. 5
1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT W ORK ......................................................................................... 5
1.8 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 5
1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ................................................................................................ 5
1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS................................................................................................ 6
1.11 CASH ALLOWANCES: ......................................................................................................... 6
1.12 SEPARATE PRICES ............................................................................................................ 6
1.13 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS.................................................................... 6
1.14 SAMPLES ......................................................................................................................... 7
1.15 EQUIPMENT SELECTION ..................................................................................................... 7
1.16 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION ................................................................................ 8
1.17 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL .............................................................................................. 10
1.18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ......................................................................... 16
1.19 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF W ORK BETWEEN THE TRADES ................................................. 17
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................... 24
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ............................................................................................ 24
PART 3 – EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 25
3.1 PROGRAMME .................................................................................................................. 25
3.2 PROGRESS REPORT ........................................................................................................ 25
3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES.......................................................................... 25
3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS ......................................................................................................... 28
3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES .................................................................................................... 29
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING .................................................................................................. 29
3.7 PROTECTION .................................................................................................................. 29
3.8 PAINTING, LABELING AND FINISHING .................................................................................. 30
3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE ............................................................................................ 33
3.10 COMPLETION .................................................................................................................. 33
3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER ............................................................................................... 33
3.12 PROTECTION OF OWNER’S PREMISES ............................................................................... 34

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16010-Electrical
General Provisions.doc
SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. These Specifications are an integral part of the Contract Documents. Tendering,

Contract Requirements and General Requirements apply to Division 16 Specification
Sections.
B. Work in the Specifications is divided into descriptive Sections which are not intended
to delegate functions or work to any specific Subcontractor or identify absolute
contractual limits between Subcontractor, nor between the Contractor and his
Subcontractor. The requirements of any one Section apply to all other Sections, for
example: the motor service factor requirement. Refer to other Divisions and
Sections to ensure a completed operational product and fully coordinated standard of
work.
C. The direction to 'provide' equipment, materials, products, labour and services shall
be interpreted to 'supply, install and test' the Division 16 work indicated on the
Drawings and specified in the Specifications.
D. Provide and include in the Contract Price Division 16 work including mechanical
components and normal system accessories not shown on the Drawings or stipulated
in the Specifications, and required to ensure completed operational systems and a
fully coordinated standard of Work acceptable to the MEEPF CONSULTANT and all
authorities having jurisdiction.
E. The work essentially shall include, but shall not be limited to the following items:
1. Submission of technical specifications and samples of all supply items for

approval by the MEEPF CONSULTANT.
2. Submission of shop drawings of all items for fabrication for approval by the
MEEPF CONSULTANT prior to fabrication.
3. Application and securing of required permits and licenses including

facilitating inspection by governing agencies and payment of all fees levied
therewith.
4. Provide labor and materials required to install, test and place into operation
the MEEPF systems as called for in the Contract Documents, and in
accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
5. Provide labor, materials, and accessories required to provide complete,

operating MEEPF systems, including dismantling and/or relocation of
existing utilities when required. Labor, materials or accessories not
specifically called for in the Contract Documents, but required to provide
complete, operating MEEPF systems shall be provided without additional
cost to the EMPLOYER.
6. Termination of motors/equipment including provision of necessary

connectors and insulators.
7. Roughing-ins and wiring from Motor Control Center to motor controllers.
8. Provision for interfacing with others.

9. Fire stopping of all vertical and/or horizontal pipe penetration to fire rated
areas.
10. Miscellaneous Works:
a. Hacking of non-structural wall and partitions to provide opening for

pipes and sealing of opening around sleeves and pipes including
provision of escutcheon plates.
b. Grouting of opening in walls after such pipes are in place and sealing
of all such openings if not used.
c. Flushing of newly installed plumbing system.
d. Restoration/repair of existing structures damaged during installation.
e. Miscellaneous items and other provisions required to maintain

cleanliness level of adjacent areas during the entire duration of
construction.
f. Full instruction after completing the job to the Maintenance

Personnel regarding operation and maintenance operation of the
entire installation. Provide complete printed/type instruction booklets
(hardbound) covering maintenance operation and adjustment of
each piece of equipment and list of each spare parts.
11. Testing and Commissioning.
12. Submission of five (05) sets of operations and maintenance manuals and as-
built plans.
13. Training of Owner’s plant operators on the system’s maintenance and

operation.
14. Coordination with other trades for special requirements for this package.
(i.e. concrete pads, block-outs, relays, etc.). It shall be understood that the
final location of equipment and devices (lighting fixtures, panelboards,
outlets, etc.) may be moved in the field by a distance of 4.57 meters (15
feet) from the location shown without extra cost, provided such notice is
given prior to installation.
15. Provision of guarantee as specified in the Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the
authority or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of
the utility companies serving the project and the EMPLOYER’S insurance
underwriter.
B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where

requirements differ, the more stringent apply.
C. Should any change in drawings or specifications be required to comply with the

governing regulations, notify the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to
submitting bid.
D. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of the
Standards and Codes listed under item 1.3.

E. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough,
substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen. Provide a competent,
experienced, full-time MEEPF Project Manager who is authorized to make decisions
on behalf of the GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviations:
1. PS Philippines Standard
2. PEC Philippine Electrical Code
3. ANSI American National Standards Institute
4. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
6. IEC International Electro-technical Committee
7. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
8. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
9. NEC National Electrical Code
10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
12. UL Underwriters Laboratory
13. AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association
14. ADC Air Diffusion Council
15. ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
16. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
17. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
18. AWWA American Water Works Association
19. PSME Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineering Code
20. NPCP National Plumbing Code of the Philippines
21. NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines
22. FCP Fire Code of the Philippines
23. IPC International Plumbing Code
24. IMC International Mechanical Code
25. FM Factory Mutual
26. NBS National Bureau of Standards
27. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers (Handbook)
28. ANSI American National Standard Institute
29. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials

B. Definitions
1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to MEEPF CONSULTANT

for review, refer to Architectural General and Special Conditions for proper
procedures.
2. FURNISH means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing

apparatus, controls, tests, accessories, and all other items customarily
required for the proper and complete application.
3. INSTALL means to join, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect

together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for
regular operation.
4. PROVIDE means to FURNISH, INSTALL and TEST.
5. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE, or his representative.
6. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed

behind wall furring or within drywall partitions, furniture wiring management
or installed within hung ceilings.
7. SUBMIT means submit to EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for review.
8. “ARCHITECT”, “EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE”, “MEEPF

CONSULTANT”, “STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT”, “LEED CONSULTANT”,
“COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY” the Party or Parties responsible for
interpreting, accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under “this
Contract”.
9. “GENERAL CONTRACTOR”, the party responsible of the installation.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Provide new materials and equipment of proven design and quality. Provide current
models of equipment with published ratings certified by recognized local and
international testing and standards agencies.
B. Workmanship and installation methods shall conform to the best modern practice.
Employ skilled tradesmen to perform work under the direct supervision of fully
qualified personnel.
C. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturers written recommendations.
D. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA and other industry standards in the selection and
provision of equipment, materials, pipe and system components.
E. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA Standards for the supply and installation of all
equipment.
F. Meet the additional selection, sizing and performance criteria specified in this
Specification.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Meet the requirements and recommendations of local Municipal Ordinances.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and schedule Division 16 work with all other work in the same area or
with work which is dependent upon Division 16 work so as to facilitate mutual
progress.
B. Identify and resolve interference problems prior to prefabrication and installation of

equipment. Submit interference drawings for review upon MEEPF CONSULTANT
Request.
C. Examine the site and all Contract Documents prior to bid submission. No allowance
will be made for any difficulties encountered due to any features of the building,
methods of construction, site or surrounding public and private property which
existed up to the bid close.
1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT WORK
A. Do not proceed with any changes to the Work without written authority from the
Owner.
B. Follow procedures outlined in Tendering and Contract Requirements for

administration and execution of Contract revisions.
C. Quotations for changes to Division 16 work shall be based on:
1. Methods either approved or directed by the MEEPF CONSULTANT.
1.8 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT
A. Where equipment has been pre-purchased by the EMPLOYER for installation by

Division 16, assume complete responsibility for acceptance, delivery schedule, off
loading, storage, rigging, installation, protection, start-up and warranty of this
equipment, all as if the equipment were provided by Division 16.
B. The responsibilities of the equipment supplier are delineated in the pre-purchase

documents which are available for MAIN CONTRACTOR review during the bid
period.
C. The following equipment has been pre-tendered in order to ensure equipment

delivery in time to meet the building construction schedule.
D. Include in Contract Price, the cost of the following pre-purchased equipment.
E. The EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall bear the equipment and FOB job site
shipping costs directly.
F. Request from the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, full details of the equipment

and the manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Include related information in the Operating
and Maintenance Manual.
G. Assume extensions of warranties to meet specified times.
1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
A. The Defects Liability Period for the purposes of this Sub-Contract shall be a period of
twelve months from the ‘Date of Practical Completion’, providing that during such
period the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall have remedied and made good all faults
or defects as described below, to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE

satisfaction.
B. During the Defects Liability Period, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall at his own
cost remedy and make good with all possible speed any faults or defects in the Plant
or Works due, in the opinion of the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, to faulty
materials, workmanship or design and, shall indemnify the EMPLOYER against any
damage or injury to the Building contents and/or occupants arising as a result of such
faults or defects.
C. If the GENERAL CONTRACTOR fails to remedy such faults or defects within a

reasonable time the Employer may proceed to do so at the risk and expense of the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR and without prejudice to such other rights as the
Employer may have under the Sub-Contract.
D. Other requirements shall be as described in the relevant section of the Specification.
1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. Submit Supplementary Sanitary Bid Form. Failure to comply with the stated
requirements of the Bid Form may nullify the bid.
B. The Bidder is invited to submit additional alternative prices not specifically requested
with the Bid.
C. Alternative prices may be used to establish the lowest Contract Price.
D. The lowest or any Bid will not necessarily be accepted.
1.11 CASH ALLOWANCES:
A. Requirement set forth under Instruction to Bidders
1.12 SEPARATE PRICES
A. Submit separate prices on the Bid Form and express as a credit or an extra to the
Stipulated Bid Sum.
B. Calculation of the Contract Price will include separate prices consistent with their
acceptance or rejection by the Employer.
1.13 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS
A. Equipment and materials are specifically described for the purpose of indicating
standards of quality and workmanship. Base Bid on the items specified and shown
on Drawings.
B. Alternatives for equipment or materials considered equal in quality and performance

may be submitted with the Bid Form. Supply with each alternative, following bid
submission, upon request by MEEPF CONSULTANT, the following information:
1. Details of manufacture
2. Dimensions including required clearance
3. Performance data
4. The cost saving for piping and electrical changes imposed by the alternative

5. The effect upon and cost to other trades
C. Where alternatives are accepted, there will be no further cost allowances for
subsequent changes in Division 15 work or other Contracts to make the alternative
complete and equal to the specified equipment and materials.
D. If alternative equipment, differing from that which is shown on Drawings is accepted,
prepare when requested, equipment layouts at no extra cost. Show clearly in plan,
elevations and sections, all equipment details including dimensional changes. Show
location changes to pipes and wiring and the effect of these changes on the building.
Drawings shall be 1:50 scale.
E. The right is reserved to accept or reject any alternative.
1.14 SAMPLES
A. Within one month following the award of the Contract, the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall submit for review one set of labeled samples as follows:
1. Cast iron pipes and fittings

2. PVC pipes and fittings
3. Valves, strainers vents and drains
4. Pipes supports
5. Galvanized steel pipes and fittings
6. Black steel pipes and fittings
7. Sprinklers
8. Fire hose equipment and accessories
9. Floor drain gratings
10. Rainwater outlet gratings
11. Cables and wiring
12. Cable supports
13. Thermal and acoustic insulation materials
14. Vibration isolators
B. The EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE reserves the right to require samples which

show the fabrication techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the
design of accessories and other auxiliary items, before any installation work
process.
C. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall submit to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE for endorsement, manufacturer’s specification and installation
instructions for trade products.
1.15 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
A. All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this Specification and the relevant
drawings and to the approval of the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
B. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the Contract are minimum
capacities and the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall check them with the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE taking into account any variations which may be
made to the systems during the progress of the Contract Works.
C. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be required to demonstrate at site that the

duties required of the equipment are obtainable.
D. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space allocated
for the accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into account the
requirement of access for maintenance purposes.

E. In selecting makes and types of equipment, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall

ascertain that facilities for proper maintenance, repair and replacement are provided.
F. Where the GENERAL CONTRACTOR proposes to use an item of equipment other

than that specified or detailed in the drawing, which requires any redesign of the
system, drawings showing the layout of the equipment and such redesign as required
therefore shall be prepared by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR at his own expenses.
Where such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of
materials and equipment’s from that originally specified or indicated in the drawings,
the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install any such additional materials
and equipment’s required by the system at no additional cost.
G. Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specifications must be submitted for

examination and details shall be submitted for the approval of the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE before any equipment is to be ordered.
This shall include all information necessary for the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE to ascertain the equipment comply with this Specification and
drawings. Data and sales catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.
H. Before ordering equipment, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide the

EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE with full details of the weights and characteristics
of the equipment for purposes of determining floor loading, power consumption etc.
1.16 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. All materials, equipment, components and accessories shall be delivered to the Site
in a new condition, properly packed and protected against damage or contamination
or distortion, breakage or structural weakening due to handling, adverse weather or
other circumstances and, as far as practicable, they shall be kept in the packing
cases or under approved protective coverings until required for use.
B. Any items suffering from damage during manufacture, or in transit, or on site whilst
in storage or during erection shall be rejected and replaced without extra cost to
either the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE or the GENERAL CONTRACTOR
unless either of them, or their respective representatives, cause such damages.
C. In the case of such materials, equipment, components and accessories which

originate overseas:
1. The said items shall be adequately and securely packed for safe
transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in
transit and on arrival.
2. British Standard 1133 and supplements, or other comparable and acceptable

code, shall be used as a guide for the standard of packing and package
required. All bright polished or plated parts shall be treated with suitable
corrosion preventative.
3. At the time of shipping, each consignment shall be documented with packing

lists and bills of lading which shall contain full statements of the packages
consigned with particulars of the dimensions, weights, contents, shipping
marks and approximate value of each package shall be provided in duplicate
to the GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
D. Where it is stipulated in the Specification or elsewhere in the Contract that packages,

pallets, casks or other packaging or handling materials are returnable, then the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall forthwith upon receiving written notice to that effect
from the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, remove the same from the site as any other

place where the materials, equipment, components and accessories have been
unpacked.
E. Neither the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE nor the GENERAL CONTRACTOR

shall be liable for loss or damage to or return of any packages, pallets, casks or other
packaging or handling materials where the GENERAL CONTRACTOR fails to collect
as notified by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
F. After delivery to site and prior to installation the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
ensure that all materials and equipment are properly stored on site to avoid
mechanical damage and the adverse affects of heat, humidity etc. The GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall provide proper shelving and racking to support and protect the
equipment and materials. All electrical equipment shall be stored covered in its
original packaging or by plastic sheeting.
G. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall apply an approved protective crating or fix

some other protective material to the materials, equipment, components and
accessories so as to protect them after installation. In the event that the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR fails to do, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall repair to the
satisfaction of the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE or supply free of all charge
any replacement required to substitute for any part of the materials, equipment,
components and accessories which may have been damaged in whole or in part as a
result of such failure as directed by the Employers Representative and shall without
prejudice to such other liabilities under this Sub-Contract, pay for all expenses and
outgoing of the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE or the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR incurred in respect of the removal and disposal of the damaged
parts and the installation of the substitute parts.
H. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the off loading and handling
of cables on site and shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new
drums and properly protected against mechanical damage and loss with
manufacturer's seals still intact. Partly used drums of cables which have already
been used elsewhere shall not be acceptable unless special approval is given by the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE in writing.
I. Waterproof protection shall be applied to all electrical busbar and switchgears,

thermal insulation, and other materials susceptible to moisture damage during and
after installation until handover to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
J. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for unpacking and removal from
site all temporary protective covers prior to the handover of the Installation to the
Employer.
K. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall accept at job site the sanitary fittings from the
Sanitary Fitting Supplier and store on Site. The sanitary fittings shall be well
protected by the Sanitary GENERAL CONTRACTOR from damage of any kind.
After installation, each fixture shall be well protected from damage and spoilage by
effects of weather and subsequent construction and the finishing activities of other
trades.
L. All fixtures or fittings damaged due to improper installation, storage or handling will
be rejected by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE and shall be replaced with
new, undamaged items as specified. Any costs shall be borne by the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR.

1.17 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL
A. Interpretation of Drawings
1. The Specification and any drawings or other documents attached thereto and
issued by the Employers Representative shall be deemed to include, whether
or not specifically mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or work as
may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works. The
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall make due allowance in his Tender for such
materials or work.
2. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and Specification, or
where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR
shall obtain written clarification on such matters before submitting his
Tender. Any such clarification from the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE
to the GENERAL CONTRACTOR or vice versa dated prior to the submission
of the Tender, shall form part of the Sub-Contract Documents. If no
clarification is requested and obtained by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE reserves the right to select either option
irrespective of the allowances the GENERAL CONTRACTOR has made in
his tender.
B. Tender Drawings
1. Tender Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be

installed. Run and arrangement of piping and the positioning of apparatus
shall be approximately as indicated.
2. The Tender Drawings are primarily intended to enable the Tender to prepare
his estimate and submit Tender. Where runs of piping, cables, conduits, etc.
are shown to small scale these do not necessarily indicate exact positions,
and all offsets fittings and accessories that may be required are not
necessarily shown. The Tender Drawings are based on agreement with the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE taking into account co-ordination with
other services and no alteration in principle will be allowed without approval.
3. If directed by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, the GENERAL

CONTRACTOR shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications
in the layout as needed to execute properly the work and prevent conflicts
with the works of other trades.
4. After the award of the Sub-Contract, the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE

will, without charge, furnish two copies of the drawings and Specifications
and will within a reasonable time also furnish such further drawings as are
reasonably necessary to enable all the Employers Representative's
Instructions to be carried out. The EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE will
also provide all details which in the opinion of the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE are necessary for the execution of any part of the work.
5. Additional copies of the drawings and the Specification can be provided to

the GENERAL CONTRACTOR upon written request to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE, but the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE will charge
for such additional copies at current commercial rates.
C. GENERAL CONTRACTORs Drawings
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall prepare, or be responsible for

obtaining, the following drawings:
a. Installation Drawings.

b. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings.
c. Builders Work Drawings.
d. Progress Drawings
e. Record Drawings and Charts.
2. The symbol notation on all drawings shall be the same as the Tender
Drawings. New symbols, not previously used on the Tender Drawings shall
be agreed with the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE. All drawings shall
have a stenciled title block and stenciled notes.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for verifying the

accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from Tender Drawings and used in the
preparation of his drawings.
D. Installation Drawings
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall, before the relevant work proceeds,

prepare and submit for approval by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE,
all Installation Drawings showing details of his proposals for the execution of
the Sub-Contract Works. The Installation Drawings shall be based on the
Tender Drawings, and shall take into account any modifications, either to the
building or to the installation which may have taken place, and incorporate
details of the actual items of plant and equipment to be installed.
2. They shall be in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to enable
the Sub-Contract Works to be installed, and shall indicate all piping and
fittings necessary for installation, and also particular installation methods to
be applied in certain instances.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall similarly prepare all necessary

Schedules of equipment, and necessary schematic diagrams, including
internal diagrams for items of electrical equipment and diagrams showing the
inter-connections between different items.
4. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR’s Installation Drawings shall be prepared to

a scale of 1:100 for all services in the building and 1:50 or 1:20 for all plant
rooms and similar spaces, unless otherwise approved by the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
5. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall produce and submit for approval

drawings detailing and dimensioning the following:
a. Site distribution, piping routes.
b. General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the

Contract.
c. Schematic distribution for main and sub-main distribution.
d. Waste soil, vent and rain water piping layouts and details.
e. Potable water piping layouts and details.
E. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings

1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall submit for review shop drawings of any
item of plant or equipment produced by a manufacturer or equipment
supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings, connections and all other
relevant details. These shall include drawings of all control, and
instrumentation panels, pumps and other equipment as requested by the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
2. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide engineering drawings showing

the construction, external and internal layout of panels and wiring diagrams
comprising internal wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring
diagrams, for the complete system in the panels. The drawings shall also
show all electrical, pipework and capillary connections from the panels to
external equipment.
F. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’s Approval of Manufacturer's Shop Drawings
1. All drawings, schedules or other information provided by Manufacturers,

Nominated Suppliers, Nominated Sub- Contractors or Specialist Contractors
shall be approved by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR and such approval shall
ensure that all requirements of the Sub-Contract documentation have been
incorporated.
2. When this procedure has been completed, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR

shall forward paper prints and pdf file of the approved drawings, or copies of
the approved schedules or their information to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE in a similar manner to that described for the Installation
drawings.
3. No order to a Manufacturer, Nominated Supplier, Nominated Contractor or

Specialist Contractor, to commence manufacture/installation shall be given
until written approval has been given by the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
4. Any costs arising from failure to meet the above conditions shall be borne by
the GENERAL CONTRACTOR at no cost to the Sub-Contract.
G. Builders Work Information & Drawings
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide fully detailed Builders Work

drawings to show requirements for architectural or structural provisions
necessary to facilitate the execution of the Sub-Contract Works, and allow
their integration into the project. These drawings shall show dead and live
loads of all plant, and fully dimensioned details of all plant bases, wall
chases, and penetrations.
2. This information shall be prepared in sufficient time for incorporation in the

Main Building Contractors programme.
3. In cases where preliminary builders' work and structural information has

already been given by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, such
information shall be confirmed by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR (including
confirmation of weights of items of equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.)
and incorporated on his drawings.
4. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide templates for, and supervise

all builders' work required, including drilling and plugging of walls, floors and
ceilings for securing of brackets, and other builders work as is considered
normal to the trade.

5. The details required by the Main Building Contractor are to be provided as

directed, which may require advance information to be provided by the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR before the Works defined in this Specification
are to commence. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for
checking any details that may have been given before commencement of
the Works to ascertain that the said advance details are correct.
6. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be liable for all costs associated with
the late submission or omission of builders work information.
H. Progress Drawings
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall arrange for a full set of white prints of
Installation Drawings to be kept on the Site showing the progress of all work
in connection with the Sub-Contract. Such prints shall be kept up-to-date
before each site progress meeting, and all conduit, cable, pipe and trunking
runs, positions of equipment and apparatus shall be recorded on the
drawings as they are installed.
2. The Progress Drawings shall be available for inspection at any time by the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE and Main Building Contractor.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall include for his representative to keep a

diary recording the progress of the works and details of all instructions
received. The diary shall be at the disposal of the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE as and when required.
I. Record Drawings and Charts
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall issue draft copies of Record Drawings,

showing the whole of the services as installed, to the Employers
Representative one month prior to the start of commissioning.
2. Within one month of the Practical Completion of the installations, the

GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide to the satisfaction of the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE one durable plastic negative and one
copy diskette (Autocad) and four complete final sets of white prints showing
the whole of the services installed. Prior to this formal issue, the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall submit two copies of his proposed finalized Record
Drawings to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for approval.
3. Two sets of drawings for symbols shall be submitted, one of the same size
as the tender drawings, the other set shall be of A4 size suitable for eventual
inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
4. The complete symbol notation used for all Record Drawings shall be
computer generated.
5. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation
of the Works as each section is completed. The EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE shall be allowed to inspect the drawings on request
during their preparation.
6. In addition to the foregoing Record Drawings, the following charts and

drawings shall be laminated in plastic and hung in the plant rooms and
switchgear rooms:

a. Plant room key Drawings: showing all plant item numbers, locations
and duties.
b. Control Schematics
c. Electrical system schematic diagrams
J. Submission of Drawings and Equipment for Review
1. Information for review must be submitted in accordance with the agreed

programme of work and in packages relating to complete buildings or
previously agreed parts of the building.
The packages must include:
a. Installation drawings.
b. Builders work drawings.
c. Associated Manufacturer's shop drawings.
d. Technical information of proposed equipment and materials.
e. Any other relevant information required by the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE.
Each submission must be accompanied by a letter which:
a. Identifies the contents of the submission in detail.
b. Refer to previous submissions of the information and any relevant

correspondence.
c. Refers to the purpose of the submission and any other requirements

of the GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
K. EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE's Approval
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall obtain the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVEs review of his information before it is used for ordering,
fabrication or installation. The form of review will be an examination of the
drawings and/or samples by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE to
ensure that the design criteria and engineering principles described in the
Tender documents have been correctly interpreted and applied by the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
2. The review will not entail any checking of working dimensions on the
drawings.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR must carry out his own checking procedure
before submitting information for review, this checking must cover not only
his own work, but that of Manufacturers and Specialists for whom he is
responsible.
4. The review of information by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE will in

no way relieve the GENERAL CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for error
in his work or of his other contractual responsibilities and obligations.

5. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall allow a period of 2 weeks in his

programme for the Employers Representative to review and return the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR submission with comment. The GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall also indicate in his programme time allowed for
resubmission of drawings not allowed to be used for installation by the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
L. Approval Codes of Material Submittals and Shopdrawings
L.1 Each submittal will be returned to the GENERAL CONTRACTOR stamped or

marked by the MEEPF CONSULTANT indicating the appropriate action as
follows:
(A) APPROVED/UNALTERED means that fabrication, manufacture, or

construction may proceed.
(B) APPROVED AS NOTED means that fabrication, manufacture, or

construction may proceed provided submittal complies with the
EMPLOYER’s or STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT’S comments.
(BR) APPROVED AS NOTED RE-SUBMISSION IS REQUIRED If, for

any reason, the Main Contractor cannot comply with the notations,
the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall make revisions and resubmit as
described in the notations made by the STRUCTURAL
CONSULTANT.
(C) NOT APPROVED AND RE-SUBMISSION IS REQUIRED means

that the submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents and
that fabrication, manufacture or construction shall not proceed.
Submittals stamped C are not permitted on the Site of the Works
and are not to be used. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall make
the required revisions and resubmit.
(D) NOT REVIEWED MORE INFORMATION IS REQUIRED means that

the submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents and
incomplete. Submittals stamped D are not permitted on the Site of
the Works and are not to be used. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR
shall make the required revisions and resubmit for STRUCTURAL
CONSULTANTS’ review.
(E) NOT REVIEWED TO BE CHECK BY OTHERS means that the

submittal shall be review by other parties involved in the project.
Submittals stamped E is consider for information only by the MEEPF
CONSULTANT. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall make sure
that the submittals to be reviewed and approved by concern parties.
L.2 The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and shall bear the
cost of the preparation of all drawings necessary to provide those
amplifications of drawings needed for completion of the construction. The
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the correct location of his
works irrespective of approval by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE or
MEEPF CONSULTANT and shall pay all costs and expenses incurred by
other contractors due to improper location of his works.
L.3 The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and shall bear the
cost of alterations of the Works due to discrepancies, errors or omissions in
the drawings and other particulars supplied by him whether such drawings

and particulars have been approved by the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE or MEEPF CONSULTANT.
L.4 After submittals have been approved by the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE or MEEPF CONSULTANT they shall not be departed
from, unless resubmitted and approved by the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE or MEEPF CONSULTANT or modified by Variation
Order as provided under Conditions of Contract.
M. Co-ordination
1. The Installation Drawings shall illustrate that the GENERAL CONTRACTOR

design has been co-ordinated and integrated with that of other GENERAL
CONTRACTORs, the structure, and building elements, before work
commences. In addition to the Works for which he is responsible, the
drawings must show the structure, adjacent building elements and the zone
required by other GENERAL CONTRACTOR to install, operate and maintain
their equipment.
2. If the GENERAL CONTRACTOR deviates from the design intent of the

Tender drawings, he shall ensure that this deviation either does not involve a
change in any of the other GENERAL CONTRACTOR installations or that
any change necessary in the other GENERAL CONTRACTOR installations
does not incur an additional cost to their Sub-Contract.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be fully liable for any cost incurred
through his lack of co-ordination.
1.18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Before the handover of the installation, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall prepare
complete Operation and Maintenance Manuals which are to be printed in English for
all the installations. When these manuals have been agreed in details, the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall submit to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE
three copies thereof suitable bound. The Operating and Maintenance Manuals must
be handed over before the Date of Completion.
B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals should comprise the following:
1. A hard cover giving:

the name of the development
the title of the document
the name and address of the installation contractor
2. Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including contact
telephone numbers for normal and emergency use.
3. Contents page.
4. Description of the installation.
5. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.
6. Operating instructions including details of any automatic control system.
7. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule of

routine maintenance.
8. Test reports and commissioning records.

9. Recommended spare parts and lubricants.
10. List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address and local
agent, if applicable.
11. Manufacturer’s literature suitably indexed to include shop drawings, wiring

diagrams, performance curves, etc.
12. List of as-installed drawings.
13. A complete valve schedule.
C. The manual should be produced on A4 size paper, all sections should be suitably
separated and readily identifiable or pages should be numbered consecutively and
page numbers included in the contents page.
D. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy diskette and video of the
complete text of the operation and maintenance manuals.
1.19 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF WORK BETWEEN THE T RADES
A. The specifications describe in detail the proposed work included for each trade when
the GENERAL CONTRACTOR divides the work among their GENERAL
CONTRACTORs. The following summary is an outline of the work to be “Provided”,
“Furnished” or “Installed” by each of the trades included in the contract, i.e.,
Plumbing & Sprinkler, (Div. 15) ACMV, (Div. 15), Electrical & Electronics (Div. 16)
and other Divisions 1-14.
B. In the absence of more detailed information, consider the list as specific instructions
to include such work in the named contract.
C. Abbreviations are as follows:
1. “OD” - Other Division of the Contract (not Electrical or Mechanical)

2. “Plb” - Plumbing – Division 15
3. “Spr” - Sprinkler – Division 15
4. “Mech” - Mechanical – Division 15
5. “Elec” - Electrical – Division 16
6. “F” - Furnished
7. “I” - Installed
8. “P” - Provided (Furnished and Installed)

ITEM OD Plb. Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks
Motors for Mechl.,

Plumbing, Fire
Protection Equip’t
_ P P P _
Feeder Cables from Cables to be terminated in

Electrical Panels to the Motor Controls by each
Motor Controls _ _ _ _ P trade.
Motors for Mechl., Specification and drawings

Plumbing, Fire delineate detailed
Protection exceptions.
Equipment _ P P P _
Wiring for Mechl.,

Plumbing, Fire
Protection Equip’t
Motors including the
feeder cables from
motor controller _ P P P _
Wiring for Mech’l Specifications and

Equipment Motor drawings delineate in
Controls and Alarms _ P P P _ detail the work to be
performed by each trade.
Temporary Light and As per Contract Documents.

Power _ _ _ _ _
Temporary Water _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract Documents.
Toilets _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract Documents.
Temporary Fire As per Contract Documents.

Protection _ _ _ _ _
Hoisting P P P P P
Rigging P P P P P
Bracing of Building
for Safe Rigging P _ _ _ _

ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks
Cutting, Chasing & Cost where due to late

Patching P _ _ _ _ installation or improper
coordination of work is the
responsibility of the
delinquent trade.
Framed Slots and Includes drilling of holes

Openings in Walls, when required. Cost
Decks and Slabs P _ _ _ _ where due to late
installation or improper
coordination of work is the
responsibility of the
delinquent trade.
Sleeves P _ _ _ _
Waterproof Sealing
of Sleeves through
Waterproof
Slabs, Decks and

Walls _ P P P P
Fireproof Sealing
of Excess
Openings in Slabs, _ P P P P
Decks and Fire
Rated Walls
Excavation and
Backfill Inside _ P P P P
Buildings
Excavation and Coordination with the

Backfill Outside trades. Cost where due to
Buildings P _ _ _ _ late installation or
improper coordination of
work is the responsibility of
the delinquent trade.

Keep Site and

Excavation Free
From Surface
Water During
Construction P _ _ _ _
Fastenings _ P P P P
Supports P P P P P
Concrete
Encasement of
Conduits _ _ _ _ P
Below Grade
Drainage Inside
Building _ P _ _ _
Base Flashing of Cap flashing by Trade.

Electric Conduits
Through Roof
(Pitch Pockets) P _ _ _ _
Electrical
Handholes, and _ _ _ _ P
Covers
Finish Painting
(does not include
I.D. marks or color
coding specified
and provided by
each trade) P P P P P
Finished Walls and Supplying list of location

Ceiling Access of all items requiring
Doors, Panels and access doors included in
Supporting Frames P _ _ _ _ the Division requiring
same.

Plaster Rings and Plaster rings and frame

Frames I _ _ _ F furnished in electric only for
lighting fittings which are so
equipped.
Rubbish Removal P P P P P Where one trade furnishes

and another installs, the
installing trade removes the
shipping and packing
materials which
accumulate.
Special Tools for
Equipment
Maintenance F F F F F
Electric Power
Consuming Items
and Controls for
Other than
Mechanical
Equipment, e.g.
Motorized Doors P _ _ _ _
Concrete Furnishing exact

Foundations, Pads, dimensions of anchors,
Pits, Curbs, and vibration mounts and
Bases Inside templates included in each
Buildings P _ _ _ _ trade providing the
associated equipment.
Concrete Furnishing exact

Foundations Pads dimensions of anchors,
and Bases Outside vibration mounts and
Buildings P _ _ _ _ templates included in each
trade providing the
associated equipment.
Masonry Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishings of covers and

associated frames included
in each trade.

ITEMS OD Plb Spr Mech. Elec. Remarks
Sump Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishing of covers and

associated frames included
in each trade.
Concrete Lined
Trenches inside
Building
Foundations P _ _ _ _
Prime Coat
Painting _ P P P P
Fiel Touch-up
Painting of
Damaged Shop
Coats _ P P P P
Rustproofing Field
Cut and Assembled
Iron Supporting
Frames and Racks _ P P P P
Grating and
Exterior Wall
Louvers P _ _ _ _
Duct Connections
to Louvers _ _ _ P _
Equipment Except Mechanical and

Delivered and Set Electrical Equipment by
in Place P _ _ _ _ Divisions 15, & 16.
Vinyl Tape or
Painted Color-
Coding, Banding
Arrows and Similar
Identification for
Mechanical and
Electrical Work P P P P P

Under floor and Responsibility for

Header Duct _ _ _ _ P coordination is included in
this Section.
Lighting Fixtures _ _ _ _ P See Drawings.
Elevators Power connections to

disconnect switch included
P _ _ _ _ in Electrical Section.
Catwalks and
Ladders to
Electrical
Equipment P _ _ _ _
Food Service Line connections included

Equipment P _ _ _ _ in each trade.
Services to Food
Service Equipment _ P P P P
Equipment P _ _ _ _ Included in each trade.
Services to
Laundry Equipment
_ P P P P
Roughing to
Equipment
Furnished by
Others _ P P P P
D. Each Division is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination information
to any other Division supplying work to accommodate that Division.
E. For items which are to be installed but not furnished as part of this Division, the electrical
work includes:
1. Coordination of their delivery.
2. Unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade
level.
3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the
project.
4. Correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have

been subjected.
5. Field make-up and internal wiring as indicated for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place.

7. Connection to building wiring, including the purchase and installation of all

termination junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of
damage and corrosion.
B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, CFCs, Halons, or any other
material which is installed considered hazardous by the authority having jurisdiction.
C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly
installed as directed by the MEEPF CONSULTANT or by the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
D. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's

name. Model number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a
conspicuous place.
E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people.
F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar application and

sizes.
G. Fully lubricate equipment where required.
H. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting

equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation.
I. Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance, and

attendance by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE and MEEPF CONSULTANT is
required to witness such tests, associated travel costs and subsistence shall be paid
for by the MAIN CONTRACTOR.
J. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site opening
conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of
derating identified on the submittals.
K. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed in mechanical equipment rooms shall

be NEMA type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed outdoors
shall be NEMA type 3R.
L. Energy consuming equipment shall meet local energy ordinances.

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PROGRAMME
A. Within 2 weeks of the letter of intent or award, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
submit a programmed showing the details of delivery and required installation period
for each system.
These details shall also be forwarded to the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, and the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall work with the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to
produce an overall coordinated programmed for the works.
B. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall make such labor available at all stages of the
works to permit the programmed to be achieved and to carry out his work in
accordance with the requirements of the GENERAL CONTRACTOR and Main
Construction programmed.
C. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall include all key dates into his programmed
including the dates required of all Utility submissions and also the dates that
permanent power, permanent water etc. will be made available for the project.
D. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for informing the GENERAL

CONTRACTOR of his detailed requirements in respect of fuel, water, drainage and
electrical supplies, for the testing and commissioning of the plant and equipment.
The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall immediately inform the EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE of any delays caused by labor shortages, later delivery of
materials and equipment, or the failure to meet programmed by any other contractor
on site, which may affect his own programmed.
E. The programmed shall be updated monthly.
3.2 PROGRESS REPORT
A. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall submit two copies of the monthly report to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE containing:
1. Percentage of work completed including a BOQ comparison between and

actual and contracted work.
2. Description of executed work.
3. Problems or delay (if any) and how to solve these.
4. Special occurrences, accidents, etc.
5. List of drawings, also indicating revisions.
6. List of memos and instructions ordered by the consultant.
7. List of equipment and workers at the site.
8. Color photographs of the site showing necessary views of the work at not
less than 10 locations.
3.3 INSPECTION, T ESTING AND CERTIFICATES
A. Periodic inspections of the work in progress will be made to check general conformity
of the work to the Contract Documents. Observed deficiencies will be reported.

Correct deficiencies immediately.
B. Meet the requirements of all laws, bylaws, codes, regulations and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Where the Contract Documents, instructions or the governing authorities require

Division 15 work to be tested, inspected or approved, give sufficient notice of its
readiness for inspection and schedule the date and time for such inspection.
D. Uncover Division 15 work that is covered up without consent, upon MEEPF

CONSULTANT request, for examination and restore at no extra cost to the Owner.
E. Furnish certificates and evidence that Division 15 work meets the requirements of
F. Correct deficiencies immediately upon notification.
G. Cleaning and Flushing
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall clean the entire installation including

all sanitary fittings and pipe work, etc, after installation and keep them in a
new condition.
2. All pipes, etc., shall be flushed through with water, rodded when necessary to
ensure clearance of debris.
3. Cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation

becomes completed.
H. Hydraulic Testing of Pipe work
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall carry out hydraulic test on the

complete plumbing systems and the drainage system to show that it is
functioning satisfactorily within the requirements of this Specification and
local regulations.
2. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable test pumps and

arrange for a supply of water required in connection with testing of pipe work.
The test pump shall be fitted with pressure gauges which shall be of suitable
range for the pressure being applied.
3. Hydraulic tests shall be carried out as the pipe work is installed and shall be
completed before chases in walls and ducts are closed. Also test shall be
carried out prior to false ceilings and other finishes are installed.
4. All cold water and fire fighting pipe work shall be hydraulically tested for a
period of not less than 6 hours to a pressure of not less than one and half
times the working pressure, but in any case the testing pressure shall not be
less than 150 PSI for cold water and 250 PSI for fire fighting. The GENERAL
CONTRACTOR must record all test figures together with schedules of pipe
lengths and should note that testing shall be witnessed by the Employers
Representative. No pressure drop shall be allowed during the tests.
5. Testing apparatus shall be provided by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR.

Where any section of pipe work or equipment is unable to withstand the
maximum pipe work test pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipe work
test then that section of pipe work or equipment shall be re-tested at the
appropriate test pressure.

6. The Sanitary GENERAL CONTRACTOR must carry out any additional tests
required by the local authorities.
7. Drainage pipe shall be test by filling the water higher than testing point 3 m.
waiting 15 min, then checking leakage at every joints.
8. Testing of drainage systems shall be carried out in sections by dividing the

system horizontally. Each section shall comprise pipe work and fitting for
three floors/storey’s required for testing.
9. Drainage pressure pipe shall be hydraulic test at minimum pressure 50 PSI.
10. On completion of the section of drainage pipe work to be tested blank off all
open ends of pipes and ensure that all access covers are securely tightened
so that they are airtight.
a. At the base of each stack, a drain bag or drain plug is inserted and a
small quantity of water allowed to settle above it so as to form a seal
that can easily be inspected if it leaks.
b. A drain plug should be inserted at the top of the stack and in the
case of rainwater pipes at every intermittent outlet with a small
quantity of water above it.
c. Remove the blank cap from one of the drain plugs (at the top of the
stack if possible) and connect the tube from a manometer gauge to it
or by passing the tube through one of the trap seals.
d. Blow air through the tube and reconnect at the manometer gauge to
obtain a reading of 38mm w.g. the level should remain for a period
of not less than five minutes without falling and without further air
being added.
I. Operation Tests
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall ensure to the approval of the

EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE that the installation or portion thereof
has been set to work and complies with all requirements including the
following:
a. That the plant and apparatus is of robust construction and of capacity for
the duty specified.
b. That all valves, switches, controls, etc., are properly regulated and
capable of proper operation and in the case of valves that are capable of
tight shut-off.
c. That all apparatus is silent.
d. That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.
e. That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the relevant
clauses of this Specification.
f. That the alignments for all pumps are proper.
2. Should the results of these tests show that the pumps, etc or any other items
of equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures
as given in this Specification, and as accepted in the GENERAL

CONTRACTOR tender, then the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall adjust,

modify and if necessary replace the equipment without additional cost to the
Sub-Contract in order that the required performance is obtained. Should it
be necessary for the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to attend to items of plant
as described he will be responsible for cost for any damage or deterioration
to the building or any other services consequent on such attendance.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall perform all tests and demonstrations

as called for by the local authorities.
4. Testing procedures shall be submitted two months after the approval of

major equipment to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for approval.
J. Supply of Testing Equipment
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall provide all tools, pressure pumps,

instruments and recorders required to carry out the tests given in this
Section.
2. All water and electricity required for testing purposes will be supplied by the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR.
K. Pretreatment
1. Prior to start-up and after satisfactory hydraulic testing, all piping systems
shall be flushed and drained at least once through to rid off contaminating
materials.
2. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced.
L. Disinfection
1. For Pipe Installation
a. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty
water does not appear at the points of outlet.
b. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine

solution containing or least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine,
and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to
stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200
mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.
c. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed

with clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system.
d. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological

examination that contamination remains present in the system.
2. For Water Tank:
The entire interior of the tank shall be swabbed or sprayed with solution
containing 200 ppm of available chlorine and the solution allowed tostand for
3 hours before flushing and returning to service.
3.4 RESULTS OF T ESTS

A. If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a
satisfactory manner nor providing the requirements of this Specification, the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall decide whether this is due to incorrectness
of faulty work by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR and if this be the case, the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall, when called upon, carry out at his own expense
such alterations, replacements and adjustments as may be required to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE’s complete satisfaction. The EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final.
3.5 T EMPORARY SERVICES
A. Provide temporary mechanical services in accordance with the requirements of

Section 01500/01600.
B. Make connections to temporary power source provided and provide extensions for
use by Division 15/16.
C. Install and maintain temporary fire protection services as required by the authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. When the permanent water service is installed, it shall be used to supply water for
the use of Other Contractors.
E. Perform operations necessary for checking, testing and balancing after written
approval is given to start up systems. Ensure that care is taken to protect equipment
from damage and to prevent distribution of dust through duct systems.
F. Do not use permanent plumbing, heating or air conditioning systems for temporary
services during construction, except with written permission from MEEPF
CONSULTANT.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Give notification in time to Other Contractors of openings required for Division 15/16
Work. Supply accurate details of location and size. When this requirement is not
met, bear the cost of cutting and patching.
B. In existing work, cutting, patching and restoration of finished work to original

condition will be carried out by Other Contractors at the expense of Division 15/16.
C. Obtain written MEEPF CONSULTANT approval before cutting openings through

structure.
D. Where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered, cut, patch
and restore to match existing work.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect all Division 15/16 work from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at
all times.
B. Cover openings in equipment, pipes with caps or heavy gauge plastic sheeting until
final connections are made.
C. Repair any damage caused by improper storage, handling or installation of

equipment and materials.
D. Protect equipment, pipes and temporary services installed by Division 15/16 from
weather damage.

3.8 PAINTING, LABELING AND FINISHING
A. Materials
1. All parts of the work installed under this Specification shall be painted with
approved high quality enamel paints, except those items specified as being
painted by others or otherwise exempted from painting in this section of the
Specification.
2. Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature on the surface which it

is applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental
conditions in which it shall be located.
3. All paint used shall be of one approved manufacture, and finishes shall be
full gloss unless otherwise specified.
4. Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall submit the color scheme to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESETATIVE for approval.
5. Before ordering any painting materials, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall

submit the type and manufacturer of all materials for approval.
6. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall select all finishing and painting

materials from types suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and
for the environmental conditions in each area.
7. The fire services equipment shall be painted in red color with two coatings of
red lead primer.
B. Plant, Machinery & Equipment
1. All items of plant, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex factory shall
be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel, except where the
manufacturer's standard finish is approved.
C. Exposed Metalwork
1. All exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and cleaned from rust, scale,
dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one undercoat and
one approved color finishing coat of full gloss enamel.
2. The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be an approved

galvanized iron primer.
3. The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork shall be approved as

suitable for the metal to which it will be applied.
D. Concealed Metalwork
1. All galvanized iron surface concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings, building
ducts etc. shall not be painted. All black iron and steel surfaces shall be wire
bushed and given one coat of zinc chromate or red lead.
E. Pipe work & Metal Sheathing
1. Pipe work and metal sheathing shall be painted as for exposed or concealed
metalwork as applicable.

2. Turned parts of valves, controls etc., shall be cleaned and polished to

approval.
F. Pipe work Identification
1. All pipes etc. shall be identified in accordance with British Standards

1710:1984 or other comparable and acceptable code.
2. Circumferential bands of standard colors shall be not less than 100mm wide
on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and not less than 150mm wide on
pipes greater than 50mm nominal diameter.
3. Supplementary colors shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm wide
in the center of the ground color bands.
4. Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting colors in

accordance with the standard, in block letters not less than 15mm high for
pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40mm
high for larger pipes.
5. Identification bands shall be located where they are clearly visible in each
room or compartment through which the pipe runs, and shall be placed at
centers not exceeding 6m.
6. Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent

to each color band. Arrows shall be 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm
nominal diameter, and 150mm long on larger pipes.
G. Color Schemes
1. The whole of the piping installation shall be painted in accordance with the
existing piping colors schemes wherever applicable and color coded as
follows:
Condensate water pipe - Orange

Potable water pipe - Blue
Non-Pot/Gray water pipe - Green
Waste pipe - Brown
Soil pipe - Black
Vent pipe - Gray
Fire pipe - Red
Chilled water pipe - White
Condenser water pipe - Orange
Equipment shall be paint and color coded to BS 381C:1980 or the PSME Code as
follows :
Equipment Color No.
Switchboard and Control Electric Orange-White Interior

Panel
Electric Motors Primrose 310
Electric Conduits Light Orange 557
Pumps and tanks As for respective piping service -
All other equipment As directed -

H. Labeling
1. All plant and equipment provided under this Specification is to be labeled in

English as to duty or services, all such Labeling to correspond to schedules,
diagrams, etc. to be provided as part of the Record Drawings. Labels are of
white Traffolyte with black engraved lettering not less than 20mm high or as
otherwise required and approved.
2. Manufacturers' nameplate shall generally be provided for all plant and

equipment and shall show serial and model numbers and date of
manufacture.
3. All valves, motor starters, fans, distribution boards, gauges, contactors, cable
terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers shall have labels.
4. Labels should be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light
gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve box
where provided. These labels shall state the valve number.
5. Distribution boards, starters etc. shall be labeled to indicate the circuit

number, phase and item controlled.
6. Labels shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not

acceptable.
7. Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Employers Representative

prior to manufacture.
8. A complete valve schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built drawings and

this schedule shall clearly indicate the valve numbers, duty, function, size,
flow rate and any other relevant information necessary to allow the
Employer's plant operators to safely operate each valve and to subsequently
maintain or replace the valve as required.
9. The valve schedule shall clearly relate to the various system schematics to
enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.
I. Application of Painting
1. All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.
2. All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct

adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as
recommended by the paint manufacturers. Subsequent painting of
galvanized surfaces shall comply with this Specification.
3. Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be

thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and
swarf. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease and
dirt.
4. When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved
primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have
been primed, the Sanitary GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall notify the
engineers so that an inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to
the application of the undercoat and the finishing coats.

5. When the priming coat has been approved, one coat of an approved paint
flat undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the undercoated surface is
rubbed flat and smooth. Finally, two coats of an approved high gloss
finishing paint shall be applied when all dust has been removed.
6. Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of

the next coat. The minimum thickness of each layer to be 50u.
3.9 T EMPORARY AND T RIAL USE
A. Obtain written permission from Consultant to use and test permanent equipment and
systems prior to Substantial Performance acceptance by Consultant.
B. Consultant may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance.
Provide labour, fuel, material and instruments required for testing. Rectify
incomplete work immediately to the satisfaction of Consultant.
C. Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials
during temporary usage.
D. Clean and renew equipment and systems used prior to acceptance.
E. Warranty, including duration and commencement date, shall not to be affected by

start-up date of equipment.
3.10 COMPLETION
A. Remove all debris from inside Division 15/16 systems and equipment.
B. Rectify deficiencies and complete work before submitting request for Substantial
Performance inspection.
C. Follow manufacturer's written instructions regarding bearing lubrication. Remove

grease from pillow block type bearings and install new grease before equipment is
put into operation.
D. Check and align all drives to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
E. Check and align all pumps to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
F. Remove all temporary protection and covers.
G. Remove oil and grease from equipment and bases.
H. Clean all fixtures and equipment. Polish all plated surfaces.
I. Change air and water filters.
J. Remove, clean and reinstall pipeline strainer screens.
K. Leave Division 15 work in as new working order.
3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER
A. Submit to Owner, check lists for each system or piece of equipment, indicating that
all components have been checked and are complete prior to instruction period.
B. Thoroughly instruct the Owner in the safe and efficient operation of the systems and

equipment.
C. Arrange and pay for the services of qualified manufacturer's representatives to

instruct Owner on specialized portions of the installation, such as refrigeration
machines, boilers, automatic and water treatment.
D. Submit a complete record of instructions given to the EMPLOYER. For each

instruction period, supply the following data:
1. Date
2. Duration
3. System or equipment involved
4. Names of persons giving instructions
5. Names of persons being instructed
6. Other persons present
E. Submit receipted verification of completed training to MEEPF CONSULTANT prior to

final release of retentions.
F. Carry out instructional period during a period of 5 days scheduled at Owner's

convenience.
G. Video tape all instructional sessions and turn over copy of tape to Owner upon
completion of training period.
3.12 PROTECTION OF OWNER’S PREMISES
A. Adhere strictly to the EMPLOYER'S requirements.
B. Confer with the EMPLOYER concerning schedule, dust and noise control prior to
commencing work in or adjacent to existing facilities where such work might affect
either those facilities or their occupants.
C. Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to occupants, public and
normal use of premises.
D. Provide temporary means to maintain security when security has been reduced by
Division 15/16.
E. Only elevators assigned for Contractor's use may be used for moving men and
material within building. Protect walls of passenger elevators, to approval of Owner
prior to use. Accept liability for damage, safety of equipment and overloading of
existing equipment.
F. Provide temporary dust screens, barriers, warning signs in locations where

renovations and alteration work is adjacent to areas which will be operative during
work.
G. Drawings indicate approximate locations of known existing underground and above

ground facilities. Avoid damage to existing services. Bear cost of repairs and
replacements.
H. Immediately advise MEEPF CONSULTANT when unknown services are

encountered and await instructions.
I. Accept liability for costs incurred by the EMPLOYER in repairing and cleaning
equipment, etc., resulting from failure to comply with the above requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Basic Electrical Materials and Methods SECTION 16050
PART 1 - GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................... 3
1.6 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS ................................................................................................. 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 4
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 4
3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................. 4
3.4 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION ...................................................................................................... 5
3.5 SINGULAR NUMBER .............................................................................................................. 5

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16050-Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods.doc
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section, basic electrical materials and methods applies to all sections of division
16, division 1 specifications and Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install electrical wirings, systems, equipment and accessories in

accordance with the specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of
transformers, cable, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards and other items and
arrangements for the specified items are shown on the drawings.
B. Electrical service entrance equipment (arrangements for temporary and permanent

connections to the power company's system) shall conform to the power company's
requirements. Coordinate fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the power company's
system and obtain power company approval for sizes and settings of these devices.
C. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper

conductors with the conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors
are prohibited.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned which:
a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic

inspection of production of such equipment.
b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been
tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.
B. Labeled; equipment or device is when:
a. It embodies a valid label, symbol or other identifying mark of a nationally

recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
b. The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment.
c. The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to
determine safe use in a specified manner.
C. Certified; equipment or product is which:
a. Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet
nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.
b. Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
c. Bears a label, tag or other record of certification.
D. Nationally recognized testing laboratory; laboratory which is approved, in accordance

with OSHA regulations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The EMPLOYER’S approval through the EMPLOYER’S CONSULTANT(S) and

representative shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to the
job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material; which has no
approval from the EMPLOYER’S CONSULTANT(S) or representative will not be
permitted at the job site.
B. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop
drawings and other data necessary for the employer to ascertain that the proposed
equipment and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts
submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.
C. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more
than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole.
Partial submittals will not be considered for approval.
1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION 16000".

2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section
and paragraph numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
D. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with Contract requirements. Include the

manufacturer's name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical
data sheets, shop drawings, pictures, nameplate data and test reports as
required.
2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal
systems, control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring
shall be identified on wiring diagrams.
3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the
equipment manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each
part.
E. Manuals:
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Requirement set forth under Instruction to

Bidders.
F. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop

drawings.
G. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Engineer with one sample of each
of the following:
1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with
the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples were taken.
2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, outlet box, manual motor starter,
device plate, engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating
material and single pole molded case circuit breaker.
6. Each type of light fixture specified in Section 16500 or shown on the
drawings.

A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally

recognized testing laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards
where test standards have been established. Evidence of compliance shall include
certified test reports and definitive shop drawings.
B. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently

produce, as one of the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material
specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three
years.
C. Product Qualification:
1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three

installations of similar size and type as this project, for approximately fifteen (15)
years, unless noted otherwise.
2. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of
installations where the products have been in operation before approval.
D. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or

trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation
within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and
address of service organizations.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize

interferences. See Section 16010 – Electrical General Provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall
be available.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall
be the product of a single manufacturer.
C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:
1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same

manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by
others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly
for the intended service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring
diagrams.

E. When Factory Testing Is Specified:
1. The EMPLOYER shall have the option of witnessing factory tests. The
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall notify the EMPLOYER through the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENATIVE a minimum of 15 working days prior to the
manufacturers making the factory tests.
2. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished
to the MEEPF CONSULTANT prior to final inspection and not more than 90
days after completion of the tests.
3. When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is required, the
Contractor shall be liable for all additional expenses, including expenses of
the EMPLOYER/EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
3.1 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. References to the Philippine Electrical Code (PEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

(UL) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Code (NEC)
are minimum installation requirement standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where
requirements are greater than those specified in the above standards.
3.2 EQUIPMENT I NSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the PEC for all voltages specified.
C. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where the MEEPF CONSULTANT determines that the GENERAL

CONTRACTOR has installed equipment not conveniently accessible for
operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and re-installed
as directed at no additional cost to the EMPLOYER.
2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached
without the use of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over
obstacles such as, but not limited to, motors, pumps, belt guards,
transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.
3.3 EQUIPMENT I DENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the requirements of the PEC, install an identification sign which clearly
indicates information required for use and maintenance of items such as
panelboards, cabinets, motor controllers (starters), safety switches, separately
enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers and controllers in switchboards,
switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and other significant
equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved
lettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4-inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws.
Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where
other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.

3.4 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain.
A. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective

devices and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and
be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and
repainting if required.
B. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the MEEPF CONSULTANT, placed

in first class operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or
replacement.
C. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft
paper, sheet vinyl or equal.
D. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality
of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas is not
obvious.
3.5 SINGULAR NUMBER
Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular
number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices
as are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Common Work Results for Electrical SECTION 16051
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.5 COORDINATION .................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES .................................................................................. 2
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS ..................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 GROUT ................................................................................................................................ 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 2
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ....................................................... 2
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS .......................................................... 3
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION .................................................................................................. 4
3.4 FIRESTOPPING ..................................................................................................................... 4

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16051-Common
Work Results for Electrical.doc
SECTION 16051
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, the following section of Division 16 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1. 16074 – Vibration Control for Electrical Systems

2. 16130 – Raceway & Boxes
3. 16120 – Conductors & Cables
4. 16410 – Disconnect Switches
5. 16442 – Panelboards
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.

2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Grout.
5. Common electrical installation requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to
other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place

concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm)
and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3
mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches
(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm),
thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and

Suppliers”
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM, NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or
conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL I NSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of
unit for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a
way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the
vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2 SLEEVE I NSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or
formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during
construction of floor or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool
exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway
and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to

allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or
cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Section 16071.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination SECTION 16055
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................ 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS ..................................................................................... 2
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 2
3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................... 2
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA .......................................................................................................... 2
3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY ....................................................................................................... 3
3.4 COORDINATION STUDY.......................................................................................................... 4

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16055-Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination.DOC
SECTION 16055
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device

coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective
device coordination study.
1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software

programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process
for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals may be in digital form.
1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets.
2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
3. Coordination-Study Report.
A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in
this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of

computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar
magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be

responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the
direct supervision and control of engineer.
C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Acceptable Software: See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers”
2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with IEEE 399.
B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include

"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1. Optional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and
approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16

Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use
equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system
diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and
recommended device settings.
2. Impedance of utility service entrance.
3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,
showing the following:
a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.

b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection
type, impedance, and X/R ratios.

d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.

e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
f. Busway ampacity and impedance.
g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced

with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent

starting and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic
inrush current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator thermal-damage curve.
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,
ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time
adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment
range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer
ratio for overcurrent relays.
j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting
rating in amperes rms symmetrical.
3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-
breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the
following:
1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.

2. Medium-voltage controller.
3. Motor-control center.
4. Distribution panelboard.
5. Branch circuit panelboard.
B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations
and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault
current.
D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.
1. Transformers:
a. ANSI C57.12.10.
b. ANSI C57.12.22.
c. ANSI C57.12.40.
d. IEEE C57.12.00.
e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.

3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
E. Study Report:
1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents
on electrical distribution system diagram.
2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on
medium- and high-voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the
sensitivity of overcurrent relays.
F. Equipment Evaluation Report:
1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to
or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode
conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand
ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3.4 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.

2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-
circuit currents.
3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
B. Comply with IEEE 141, IEEE 241, IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time
intervals.
C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.

b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to
ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate
that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the
tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of

coordination study:
1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup
values.
c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type.
e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective

devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time
separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility
company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching
schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation.
Show the following information:
a. Device tag.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.

e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Grounding and Bonding SECTION 16060
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................. 1
1.5 IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 COORDINATION...................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 2
2.2 CONDUCTORS ....................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 CONNECTORS ....................................................................................................................... 3
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES ...................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 APPLICATIONS ....................................................................................................................... 3
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING ........................................................................................................ 4
3.3 CONDUCTIVE PIPING .............................................................................................................. 6
3.4 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ......................................................................................................... 6
3.5 GROUND RESISTANCE ............................................................................................................ 6
3.6 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................ 6
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 7

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16060-Grounding
and Bonding.doc
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1. Common ground bonding with lightning protection system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Showing the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing
of grounding electrode conductor.
C. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of

grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the
following:
1. Test wells.
2. Ground rods.
3. Ground rings.
4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
D. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
1. Certified test reports of ground resistance.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:
1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test

wells based on NETA MTS.
a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values
remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend
corrective action if they do not.
b. Include recommended testing intervals.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing

and Bonding.doc
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

PEC, Article 1.0, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
1.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide an identification nameplate for each ground bus cabinet.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Grounding connections shall be brazed molded exothermic welded, bolted clamp

terminal or pressure connector type.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required
by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules;
1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

and Bonding.doc
C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.

2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-
treated fir or cypress or cedar.
D. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm) in

cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad Stainless steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) 5/8 by 96
inches (16 by 2400 mm) in diameter.
B. Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged

with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts.
1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200
mm) long.
2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG
minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when
indicated as part of duct-bank installation.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On

feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal
inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of
green and two bands of yellow.

and Bonding.doc
D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing
service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall 6 inches (150
mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across
top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.
E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
F. Primary Equipment And Circuits
1. Switchgear: Provide a bare grounding electrode conductor from the switchgear

ground bus to the grounding electrode system, metal underground water pipe or
driven ground rods for the grounding electrode.
2. Duct Banks and Manholes:
1. Provide a bare equipment grounding conductor in each duct containing

medium or high voltage cables. Connect the grounding conductors to the
switchgear ground bus, to all manhole hardware, to the cable shielding of
medium or high voltage cable splices and terminations and equipment
enclosures.
2. Provide a grounding conductor having at least 50 percent ampacity of the
largest phase conductor in the duct bank.
3. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to the ground rod.
3. Power Transformers:
1. Provide a driven ground rod and connect with a grounding electrode

conductor to the grounding facilities at the transformer.
2. Ground the secondary neutral.
3. Connect lightning arrester grounds to the pad ground per PEC.
4. Lightning Arresters: Connect lightning arresters grounds to the equipment
ground bus or ground rods, as applicable.
5. Outdoor Fences: Connect outdoor fences around electrical equipment to the
grounding electrode system.
6. Metallic Conduit: Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical
connection to a housing of electrical equipment by means of locknut and
bushings or adapters, provided with grounding bushings. Connect bushings
with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Main Bonding Jumper: Connect the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in
the service equipment.
B. Water Pipe and Supplemental Electrode:
1. Provide a ground conductor connection between the service equipment

ground bus and the metallic water pipe system. Jumper insulating joints in
the water pipe.

and Bonding.doc
2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the water pipe ground
or connect to the service equipment ground bus.
C. Service Disconnect (Separate Individual Enclosure): Provide a ground bar bolted to

the enclosure with lugs for connecting the various grounding conductors.
D. Switchgear, Switchboards, Unit Substations:
1. Connect the various feeder green grounding conductors to the ground bus in
the enclosure with suitable pressure connectors.
2. Connect the grounding electrode conductor to the ground bus.
3. Connect the neutral to the ground bus (main bonding jumper).
4. Connect metallic conduits, which terminate without mechanical connection to
the housing, by grounding bushings and ground wire to the ground bus.
E. Transformers:
1. Exterior: Exterior transformers supplying interior service equipment shall also

have the neutral grounded at the transformer secondary. Provide a
grounding electrode at the transformer.
2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from service
equipment): Ground the secondary neutral at the transformer. Provide a
grounding electrode conductor from the transformer to the nearest cold water
pipe.
F. Conduit Systems:
1. Ground all metallic conduit systems.

2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain a grounding conductor.
3. Conduit provided for mechanical protection containing only a grounding
conductor, bond to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.
G. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install green grounding conductors with feeders and
branch circuits as follows:
1. Feeders.
2. Circuits serving preparation and kitchen equipment.
3. Receptacle outlets.
4. Directly connected laboratory equipment.
5. Motors and motor controllers.
6. Fixed equipment and appliances.
7. Items of equipment where the final connection is made with flexible metal
conduit shall have grounding wire
8. Additional locations and systems as shown.
9. Provide an insulated, isolated grounding conductor for branch circuits serving
isolated ground and isolated ground surge suppressor type receptacles.
Isolated grounding conductors shall be isolated from other grounding
systems back to the system point of origin.
H. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures and Panelboards:
1. Bond the grounding wires to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, cabinets
and other enclosures through which the ground wires pass (except for special
grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown).
2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination.
3. Provide ground bars in panelboards, bolted to the housing, with sufficient
lugs for terminating the ground wires.
I. Motors and Starters:

and Bonding.doc
1. Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter housing for ground wire
termination.
2. Make ground wire connections to ground bus in motor control centers.
J. Receptacles are not approved for grounding through their mounting screws. Ground
with a ground wire from green ground terminal on the receptacle to the outlet box
ground screw.
K. Ground lighting fixtures to the green grounding conductor of the wiring system when
the green ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit
systems. Fixtures connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire
included with the power wires from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first
outlet box.
L. Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall have ground lug installed for
termination of the green ground conductor.
3.3 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems in the building to the electrical system ground.
Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the water pipe ground or
service equipment ground bus.
3.4 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Bond the lightning protection system to the electrical system grounding electrode.
3.5 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system ground resistance must not exceed 2 ohms (1 ohm for
telecommunication systems). Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.
B. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company
ground resistance requirements.
C. Make necessary modifications needed to the ground electrodes for compliance,

without additional cost to the Owner, including the provisions of a multi-rod system.
3.6 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless
otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors
where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and
UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system
ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to
electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system
grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade,
unless otherwise indicated.

and Bonding.doc
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating,
if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod
length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding
electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are
specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," and shall be at
least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well
flush with finished grade or floor.
E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and
maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water
service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water
service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a
pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water
fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal
grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
C. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-

resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal at

and Bonding.doc
individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are
connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means
of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical
order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods
driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and
other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve
test results.
D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 5
ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 5 ohm(s).
5. Manhole Grounds: 5 ohms.
E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

MEEPF CONSULTANT promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground
resistance.
END OF SECTION

and Bonding.doc
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Firestopping Materials SECTION 16071
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................1

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF W ORK ....................................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................................1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................................1
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ...............................................................................................................2
1.5 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................................................................2
1.6 MANUFACTURERS .............................................................................................................................2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................................3
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................................4
3.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................................................4
3.2 COORDINATION .................................................................................................................................4
3.3 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................................................4
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................................................................................4
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING................................................................................................................4
3.6 CERTIFICATION .................................................................................................................................5

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16071-Firestopping
Materials.doc
SECTION 16071
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows:
A. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical
busways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions),
horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and
partitions.
B. Opening and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.
C. Opening around structural members, which penetrate floors or walls.
A. All work specified in this Section is subject to the provisions of Section 16010.
B. Refer to the following sections of related work in connection with Firestopping:
16010 - Electrical General Provisions

16072 - Electrical Equipment Noise Control, Vibration Isolation, and Seismic
Restraints
16130 - Raceways and Boxes
16120 - 600V Wires and Cables
16134 - Panelboards
16420 - Disconnect Switches & Individual Motor Controllers
C. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated

construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke,
and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies.
D. All works specified in this Section is subject to Architectural Fire Compartmentation

plans.
E. Firestopping rating shall be as follows:
(Except as noted in fire life safety/architectural drawings). However, the more stringent
applies:
Zone-to-Zone 2hrs
Floor-to-Floor 2hrs
Penetrations to External Wall 3hrs
Critical Zone within compartmentation 1hr
Penetrations to Lift stairwell shaft 2hrs
& duct chases
A. A manufacturer’s direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during

initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper
selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer’s written
recommendations published in their literature and drawing details.

Materials.doc
B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, UL 1479 or UL

2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being
penetrated.
C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes
having local jurisdiction.
D. Firestop Systems do not re-establish the structural integrity to load bearing

partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the
structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available
through a manufacturer, an engineering judgement derived from similar UL system
designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their
review and approval prior to installation.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) :
E 814 - Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops
B. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
UL 1479 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
UL 2079 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Fire Stops
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and technical data for each material
including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be
used and manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Manufacturer’s engineering judgement identification number and drawing details when

no UL system is available for an application. Engineer judgement must include both
project name and contractor’s name that will install firestop system as described in
drawing.
C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job-site.
1.6 MANUFACTURERS
A. The acceptable manufacturers of the Firestopping Sealant shall be as per Section

16007.
B. Installer qualification
Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the

firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install
manufacturer’s products per specified requirements. A supplier’s willingness to sell its
firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor
does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

Materials.doc
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material.
Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or

“post installed”. Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.
D. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814, or UL 2079 tested
for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type,
penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each
separate instance.
E. Appropriate sealant shall be used in the following materials:
1. Cast-in place firestop devices for use with non-combustible plastic pipe (closed
and open piping systems) penetrating concrete floors.
2. Sealants or caulking materials for use with fire-rated construction joints and
other gaps.
3. Sealants, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints
and other gaps.
4. Intumescent sealants for caulking materials for use with combustible items
(penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe,
PV jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe.
5. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or
cable bundles.
6. Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealant, caulking or putty materials for
use with flexible cable or cable bundles.
7. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L listed metallic and specified
non-metallic outlet boxes.
8. Firestop collar wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic
pipe (closed and open piping systems).
9. Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate
cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.
10. Non curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations
made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical
busways in raceways.
11. Provide a firestop system with an “F” Rating as determined by UL 1479 or
ASTM E814, which is equal to the rating of construction being penetrated.
12. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079,
which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

Materials.doc
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be

performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Verify penetrations are properly size and in suitable condition for application
materials.
2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt,
grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other
substances that may affect proper adhesion.
3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling adjacent surfaces
by firestopping materials.
4. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity
conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place Firestop Devices with trade
responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.
B. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for
installation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire

Resistance Directory.
B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of

through-penetration and construction joint materials.
1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water
resistant seal.
2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper
manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hammer the
performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.
3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing

areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or
penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

Materials.doc
B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop
materials and soiling as work progresses.
3.6 CERTIFICATION
The Contractor shall secure certification from the Manufacturer (not distributor nor supplier)
that the Installation done by the Contractor is in conformance set by the U.L.
END OF SECTION

Materials.doc
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Electrical Equipment Noise Control, SECTION 16074
Vibration Isolation, and Seismic Restraints
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF W ORK ....................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................ 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS .......................................................................................................... 3
2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................... 4
2.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR MUFFLER: CRITICAL TYPE ............................................................... 4
2.4 EMERGENCY GENERATOR NOISE CONTROL ............................................................................ 4
2.5 EQUIPMENT FRAMES............................................................................................................. 4
2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES................................................................................................ 5
2.7 FACTORY FINISHES ............................................................................................................... 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 6
3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 6
3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 6
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION .............................................................. 7
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 7
3.6 ADJUSTING .......................................................................................................................... 8
3.7 ELECTRICAL VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE ......................... 8

Equipment Noise Control.doc
SECTION 16074
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Division 16 Section 16073 - "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.
2. Division 16 Section 15071 – “Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls”.
3. Division 16 Section 16010 – “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of electrical equipment noise control, vibration isolation, and seismic restraint
required for the project is indicated on the Drawings and in Division 16 of the
Specifications.
B. Types of electrical equipment noise control, vibration isolation, and seismic restraint
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Vibration isolation of transformers

2. Flexible conduits at transformer connections
3. Flexible conduits at connections to motors and other vibrating equipment.
4. Electrical box-pads at stud partitions where sound insulation is provided.
5. Vibration isolation of the emergency generator.
6. Noise control for the emergency generator.
7. Seismic restraint for vibration isolated equipment.
8. Busway seismic restraint at seismic gaps and at vertical risers at ceiling.
C. The Contractor shall bring to the Project Manager’s attention prior to installation any
conflicts with other trades, which will result in unavoidable contact to the equipment,
raceways, etc., described herein, due to inadequate space, etc. Corrective work
necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor’s
expense.
D. The Contractor shall bring to the Project Manager’s attention any discrepancies between
the Specifications and field conditions, changes required to specific equipment selection,
etc., prior to installation. Corrective Work necessitated by discrepancies after installation
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
E. Seismic restraint shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Section 15200,
Sound and Vibration Isolator, and local code requirements. Provide calculations signed
by structural engineer licensed in the Philippines in which the work is to take place
certifying that the seismic restraints will act in accordance with the relevant local codes
and will maintain equipment in captive position.

F. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall have the following responsibilities:
1. Determine vibration isolation sizes and locations.

2. Provide equipment isolation system as schedule or specified.
3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection.
4. Provide installation instructions and drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The IBC: International Building Code.
B. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers
and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by AHJ.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined

loads.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight
and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic
restraints.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for

equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 16
Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and
anchorage devices.
3. Field-fabricated supports.
4. Seismic-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints
to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations,
methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate
directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic
events.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By AHJ, showing maximum

ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components

with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic
restraints.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For Structural Engineer
F. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section
are more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural

Welding Code – Steel.”
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
shall bear anchorage preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent
testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not
available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including
combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and
sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 16007 “Alternative Equipment and Suppliers”.
B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to
sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene, rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-
stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick,
neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit over 1 inch OD:
Make electrical connections to vibrating equipment via flexible expansion/deflection

conduit coupling sized as required. Coupling shall have a flexible and watertight out-
er jacket, an internal grounding strap, plastic inner sleeve to maintain smooth wire-
way, and end hubs with threads to fit standard threaded metal conduit. Acceptable
units include:
1. XD Expansion Deflection Coupling by Crouse-Hinds of Syracuse, N.Y.

2. Type DF Expansion and Deflection fitting by Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. of
Spring City, PA.
B. For conduit under 1 inch OD: Use “flexible” conduit with slack at least 3 feet or 15 di-
ameters long, whichever is the longer or provide a flexible coupling as defined above.
2.3 EMERGENCY GENERATOR MUFFLER: CRITICAL T YPE
A. Critical type emergency generator muffler shall be equal to Nelson 400.
2.4 EMERGENCY GENERATOR NOISE CONTROL
A. Emergency generator silencers, enclosures etc. shall be equal to Industrial Acoustics

Company.
2.5 EQUIPMENT FRAMES
A. Mounting frames and/or brackets shall be provided to carry the load of the equipment
without causing mechanical distortion or stress to the equipment.

B. Frame Types
1. Type A frame is a wide flange structural steel frame with brackets as shown
on the drawings. The maximum allowable deflection of any point on the
loaded frame relative to the unloaded frame shall be 0.005 inch. A wide
flange section depth greater than 1/10th the length of the longest frame mem-
ber will be accepted as satisfying the deflection requirement.
2. Type B frame is a channel steel structural frame with brackets as shown on
the drawings. The section depth shall be greater than 1/10th the length of the
longest. Frame member.
3. Type C frame is a steel bracket or gusset welded or bolted directly to the ma-
chine frame in order to accommodate the isolator.
2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and

application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they
will be subjected.
C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of

slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and
to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-
resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections, Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners
to rods.
F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type
and size of attachment devices.
H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of
eight times diameter.
J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and
stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for
anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and - tested equipment

before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior
use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to

indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on
Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to
seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic
loads within specified loading limits.
3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.

2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to
wall.
C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure

at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
D. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes
for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-
duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural
element to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the
hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of
air pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by
different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is
anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach
equipment.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, through MEEPF
CONSULTANT, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component
(unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days'
advance notice.
3. Obtain MEEPF CONSULTANT’S approval before transmitting test loads to structure.
Provide temporary load-spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
MEEPF CONSULTANT’S.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
3.7 ELECTRICAL VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE
A. Supported or Suspended Equipment: As indicated on plans or as required
1. Equipment Location: As indicated on plans

2. Pads:
a. Material: Neoprene, Rubber, Hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.

b. Thickness: As per Structural recommendation
c. Durometer: As per Structural recommendation
d. Number of Pads: As per Structural recommendation
3. Isolator Type: As indicated on Part 2.

4. Component Importance Factor: Refer to Structural specs
5. Component Response Modification Factor: Refer to Structural specs
6. Component Amplification Factor: Refer to Structural specs
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Electrical Identification SECTION 16075
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY........................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................................... 1
1.5 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................ 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS .................................................................... 2
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS ........................................... 2
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS ................................................... 3
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS ............................................................................ 3
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE...................................................................................................... 4
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE W ARNING TAPE................................................................................. 4
2.7 W ARNING LABELS AND SIGNS ............................................................................................ 4
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS ......................................................................................................... 5
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS ................................................................................... 5
2.10 CABLE TIES ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS ...................................................................... 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................................. 6

3.1 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 6
3.2 IDENTIFICATION MODULE ................................................................................................... 7

Identification.doc
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements
in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with
those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations
throughout project.

Identification.doc
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-)
high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted,
flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of
raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter
sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide
black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends
full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.
H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped
legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with
corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE I DENTIFICATION MATERIALS
color field for each raceway and cable size.

Identification.doc
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field

2. Legend: Indicate voltage
C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-)
high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of
legend label.
E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50
mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE I DENTIFICATION MATERIALS
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
legend label.
C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped
legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with
manufacturer.
E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve,

2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies
and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR I DENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08
mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
legend label.

Identification.doc
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve,

2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies
and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with
manufacturer.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING T APE
A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white
stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING T APE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify

and locate underground electrical [and communications] utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS
CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
2.7 WARNING L ABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with PEC and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive

labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and
size required for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

Identification.doc
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with

0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES
(915 MM)."
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs
up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay
shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT I DENTIFICATION L ABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay
shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with

white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall
be 1 inch (25 mm)

Identification.doc
2.10 CABLE T IES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking,
Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior
sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7
MPa).
4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2
MPa).
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
5. Color: Black.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS I DENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location
(exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials

and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.

Identification.doc
F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding
band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color
markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of
walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m)
maximum intervals in congested areas.
G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor
or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below
finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common
trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for surface
preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION MODULE
A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-
inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background
that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend
"DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black
letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following
finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm)
of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,
exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive
vinyl labels. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and
Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 220 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl
label. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum intervals.
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system
legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
3. UPS.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the
phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for
ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

Identification.doc
a. Color shall be factory applied
b. Colors for 220V, 1Ø Circuits:
1) Phase: Red
2) Neutral: White
3) Ground: Green
c. Colors for 380/220V, 3Ø Circuits:
1) Phase A: Red
2) Phase B: Yellow
3) Phase C: Blue
4) Neutral: White
5) Ground: Green
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes
where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to
prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable
markings.
F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.
G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list
source.
I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals,

and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system
used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in
raceway.
K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction
of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403
unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar
equipment in finished spaces.
L. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metal-
backed, butyrate warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

Identification.doc
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.
M. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
N. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at
equipment used for power transfer load shedding.
O. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master
units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system.
Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm
systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label Adhesive film label with clear protective
overlay. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-
1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2
inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label] [Stenciled
legend 4 inches (100 mm) high.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those
appropriate for viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating
of the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be laminated acrylic
or melamine label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
g. Substations.
h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
i. Motor-control centers.
j. Enclosed switches.
k. Enclosed circuit breakers.
l. Enclosed controllers.
m. Variable-speed controllers.
n. Push-button stations.
o. Power transfer equipment.
p. Contactors.
q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

Identification.doc
r. Battery-inverter units.
s. Battery racks.
t. Power-generating units.
u. Monitoring and control equipment.
v. UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION

Identification.doc
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Startup, Testing and Commissioning of SECTION 16080
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.2 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 TESTING CRITERIA ................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE, REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..................................... 3
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 4
1.6 CALIBRATION ......................................................................................................................... 5
1.7 FAILURE TO MEET TEST ......................................................................................................... 5
1.8 NOTIFICATION OF TESTING ..................................................................................................... 5
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) ................................................................................................ 6
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 6

3.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE TESTED..................................................................................................... 6
3.2 DEMONSTRATION ................................................................................................................. 14

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16080-Startup,
Testing and Commissioning of Electrical Equipment.doc
SECTION 16080
STARTUP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and
related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for startup testing and
commissioning of electrical equipment:
1. Section 16051 - Common Work Results For Electrical

2. Section 16055 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
3. Section16060 - Grounding and Bonding
4. Section 16073 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
5. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification
6. Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
7. Section 16124 - Medium-Voltage Cables
8. Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes
9. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
10. Section 16145 - Lighting Control Devices
11. Section 16211 - Electricity Metering
12. Section 16231 - Packaged Engine Generator
13. Section 16264 - Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
14. Section 16271 - Power Transformers
15. Section 16280 - Automatic Power Factor Correction
16. Section 16289 - Transient Voltage Suppression
17. Section 16341 - High Tension Switchgear
18. Section 16410 - Circuit Breakers
19. Section 16415 - Transfer Switches
20. Section 16430 - Low Tension Switchgear
21. Section 16435 - Paralleling Switchgear
22. Section 16442 - Panelboards
23. Section 16450 - Busways
24. Section 16511 - Luminaires
B. In the event of conflict regarding startup testing and commissioning of electrical

equipment requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions
of this Section shall govern.
C. Division 16 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified

in Sections 17100, 17106, 17107, 17109, 17110 and other sections referenced in
17100. These include, but are not limited to, commissioning, enhanced
commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of the
EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of an approved testing

organization to provide startup testing and commissioning of the electrical equipment
and/or systems listed in Section 16000, Electrical General Provisions.
B. Section 16010, Basic Electrical Requirements. GENERAL CONTRACTOR refers to

electrical contractor engaged for the purposes of installing and assembling electrical
equipment.
C. It is the intent of these test to assure that all electrical equipment, both GENERAL
CONTRACTOR and EMPLOYER-Furnished, is operational within industry and the
manufacturer’s tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications
and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Where applicable, the tests and inspections shall determine the suitability for
energization.
1.3 T ESTING CRITERIA
A. General:
1. The testing company shall provide the supervision, material, equipment,

labor and technical personnel to perform all tests and inspections according
to NETA. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall, at his expense, furnish any
personnel necessary to assist in the testing and inspection.
2. When the tests and inspections have been completed, a label shall be
attached to all devices tested. The label shall provide the name of the
testing company, the date the tests were completed, and the initials of the
person who performed the tests.
B. Responsibilities:
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall clean the equipment, torque down all
accessible bolts according to the equipment manufacturer’s instructions,
perform routine insulation resistance tests on all branch and feeder circuits,
continuity checks on all branch and control wiring, and rotation tests for all
distribution and utilization equipment.
2. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall furnish a complete set of current plans
and specifications to the testing company prior to commencement of any
testing. At each test site, the GENERAL CONTRATOR shall provide any
test control power necessary to perform the tests specified. The test
organization shall be consulted as to the specific power requirements. The
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall notify the testing organization when the
equipment and systems are ready for their inspection and testing. After
review by the testing engineer, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall correct
any deficiencies noted by the testing company.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for having the
manufacturer of each equipment and/or system provide factory-trained
representative(s) that will perform all required functional testing, checkout,
and repairs in order to pronounce the equipment and/or systems meet the
requirements of these specifications and Drawings and it is ready for startup
testing and commissioning by the testing organization as specified hereafter.
4. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall furnish settings of protective devices.
5. The testing organization shall notify the EMPLOYER’S RERESENTATIVE
prior to the commencement of any testing. The testing organization shall set
and adjust the protective devices and associated auxiliary timing devices in
accordance with the values furnished by the MEEPF CONSULTANT.
6. The testing organization shall maintain a written record of all tests and, upon
completion of the tests, include them in a final report. The report shall detail
any deficiencies in the system material, workmanship or design. The testing
company shall, upon identification, report deficiencies to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE in written form. The EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE will report these deficiencies to the Contractor or

manufacturer to schedule remedies.
7. When directed, the testing organization shall enter “address” codes for power
monitoring devices or similar instrumentation where shown. Test monitoring
instrumentation for accuracy in combination with associated PTs and CTs.
C. Safety:
1. Safety practices shall comply with applicable state and local safety orders,
as well as with the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) and
IEEE Standard 510. Compliance with the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standard NFPA 70E, and the Accident Prevention
Manual for Industrial Operations of the National Safety Council shall be
observed.
2. Tests shall only be performed on apparatus that is deenergized. The testing
company’s lead test engineer for the project shall be a designated safety
representative and shall supervise testing observations and safety
requirements. Work shall not proceed until he has determined that it is safe
to do so.
3. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hotline-
grounding device approved for the purpose. Warning signs and protective
barriers shall be provided as necessary to conduct the tests safely.
D. Reports:
1. General: Provide full documentation of all tests in the form of a report.

2. The test report shall include the following sections:
a. Scope of testing.
b. Equipment tested.
c. Description of test.
d. Test results.
e. Conclusions and recommendations.
f. Appendix, including test forms.
3. Each piece of equipment shall be recorded on a data sheet listing the

condition of the equipment as found and as left. Included shall be
recommendations for any necessary repair and/or replacement parts. The
data sheets shall indicate the name of the engineer who tested the
equipment and the date of the test completion. The EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE shall be notified within 24 hours of any defects found
during testing.
4. Record copies of the completed test report shall be submitted to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE no more than 30 days after completion
of the testing and inspection.
5. Test reports for circuit breakers shall be provided at equipment startup.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE, REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The testing and inspection shall comply with all applicable sections of the applicable
codes and standards listed in Division 1 of the project specifications.
B. The inspection and testing shall comply with the project plans and specifications, as
well as with the manufacturer’s drawings, instruction manuals, and other applicable
data that may be provided by the Owner, for the apparatus tested.

C. Conform to the following Standards:
1. ANSI/IEEE Standard 43-2000 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing

Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
2. ANSI/IEEE 112-1996 – Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
3. ANSI/IEEE Standard 400-1991 – IEEE Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage
Tests On Power Cable Systems in the Field.
4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 – IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low Voltage AC Power Circuits.
5. ASTM D 877-2004 – Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage
of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
6. ICEA S-93-639 / NEMA WC74-2000 – Shielded Power Cable 5-46 kV.
7. IEEE Standard 81-1983 – IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,
Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potential of a Ground System.
8. IEEE Standard 510-1983 (R1992) – Recommended Practices For Safety In
High-Voltage And High-Power Testing.
9. IEEE Standard 576-2000 – Recommended Practice for Installation,
Termination and Testing of Insulated Power Cables as Used in Industrial and
Commercial Applications.
10. IEEE Standard C57.12.90-1999 – Standard Test Code for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.
11. IEEE Standard C57.12.91-2001 – Standard Test Code for Dry-Type
Distribution and Power Transformers.
12. NECA – National Electrical Contractors Association.
13. NETA – International Electrical Testing Association.
14. NETA ATS-2003 – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems. A copy of this is in Section
16080_app.
15. NFPA 70E-2004 – Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces.
16. NICET – National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The testing organization shall be an independent, third party testing organization,
which will function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the
manufacturers, suppliers and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the
testing organization.
B. Manufacturer’s representative or equally qualified individual shall be present during

all testing to ensure the testing is performed properly and that any deficiencies
discovered are promptly corrected.
C. The testing organization shall be a full-service company and shall be regularly

engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems.
The testing organization shall utilize factory-trained test engineers who are regularly
employed for testing services and who are capable of troubleshooting, as well as
identifying power equipment problems.
D. All work outlined shall be performed under the full-time, onsite supervision of a
graduate engineer with a minimum of 5 years of field-testing experience. Supervisor
shall hold a current registered certification in electrical testing applicable to each type
of apparatus to be inspected or tested. Certification in electrical testing shall be
issued by an independent, nationally recognized, technician certification agency.
Acceptable agencies and certifications:

1. NETA: Certified Technician/Level III or Certified Senior Technician/Level IV.

2. NICET: Engineering Technician/Level III or Senior Engineering
Technician/Level IV.
E. Upon request, the testing company shall submit proof of its qualifications.
1.6 CALIBRATION
A. Any system material or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of

acceptance tests, shall be reported directly to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
B. GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall replace the defective material or equipment and

have test repeated until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to the
EMPLOYER.
1.7 FAILURE TO MEET T EST
A. Any system material or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of

acceptance tests, shall be reported directly to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
B. Contractor shall replace the defective material or equipment and have test repeated
until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to the EMPLOYER.
1.8 NOTIFICATION OF T ESTING
A. Notify the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, MEEPF CONSULTANT and the

EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ten (10) working days before any scheduled
testing begins.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE T ESTED
A. Section 16140, Wiring Devices:
1. Receptacles or Outlets
a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI)
i. All GFCI outlets and protected outlets will be tested individually to

ensure they all meet protection requirements. A full GFCI test involves
the Test/Reset Button Test, Wiring Test and GFCI Circuit Challenge.
(a) Test/Reset Button Test:
(1) Ensure the energized circuit can be appropriately de-

energized.
(2) It is preferable to have a light, a fan, or a circuit tester connect
to the outlet to ensure the energization status of the circuit.
(3) Press the Test Button.
(4) The Reset Button should pop out. If it does not, proceed to
step (8).
(5) If the Reset Button pops out, check to ensure the electrical
equipment has become de-energized. If the electrical
equipment has not de-energized, proceed to step (8).
(6) If the electrical equipment has de-energized, press the Reset
Button. The Reset Button should stay reset and the electrical
equipment should re-energize. If the Reset Button does not
reset or the electrical equipment does not re-energize, proceed
to step (8).
(7) Repeat steps (3) through (6) with the light, fan, or circuit tester
plugged into the other receptacles.
(8) If the outlet fails any part of the Reset Button test, either the
outlet is miswired or needs to be replaced. If the repair cannot
be accomplished immediately and the outlet must remain in
service, place a caution label over the outlet to prevent usage
until the repairs or replacement are completed. Once repaired
or replaced the outlet must be fully tested before use is
allowed.
(9) When testing slaved outlets, repeat steps (3) through (8) with a
device plugged into the slaved outlet. Use the Test and Reset
Buttons on the GFCI that provides protection for the outlet to
perform the Test/Reset Button Test.
(b) Wiring Test:
(1) Acquire an accepted wiring test similar to the Greenlee GFCI

Circuit Tester with a wiring tester, catalog number 5708,
NAED/DCI# 78-3310/34523.
(2) If using a combination GFCI/Wiring Tester, set the nominal
leakage current knob to zero mA.
(3) Plug the tester into a receptacle on the outlet to be tested.
(4) Check the tester display to ensure proper wiring.
(5) If the wiring is improper and cannot be immediately repaired,

proceed no further, cover the outlet with a caution label until

the outlet has been properly wired and then repeat the tests
prior to allowing the outlet to be used.
(c) GFCI Circuit Challenge:
(1) Test the current that causes the GFCI to trip.
(i) Turn the current selector knob to the next higher current
setting;
(ii) Wait for the test light to flash;
(iii) If the GFCI trips out;
 Reset the knob to zero current;

 Press the Reset Button on the GFCI the outlet the
GFCI is wired to or the GFCI circuit;
 Check for test lights to indicate the circuit is re-
energized;
 Remove the tester from the outlet.
(iv) If the circuit does not trip out, repeat steps (i) through
(iv).
(v) If the GFCI fails to trip within 4 to 7 mA and the GFCI
cannot be currently replaced, proceed no further, place a
caution label over the outlet, indicate faulty GFCI and
once the outlet has been replaced repeat the tests prior
to allowing the outlet to be used.
(2) After the GFCI has tripped, repeat the tests in (a), (b) and (c)
for the other receptacle (on a 2-receptacle GFCI outlet) and
all GFCI protected outlets.
(d) Placing a Test Sticker:
(1) If the outlet passes all of the above tests, place a GFCI test
sticker on the outlet cover with the following information:
(i)The test date;
(ii) The tester’s initials and company;

(iii) The current level where the interruption occurred;
(iv) The wiring status;
(v) And the number of the outlet (to distinguish the GFCI
protected outlets from each other for documentation
purposes).
B. Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding:
1. Test, in the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE’S presence, the ground

resistance of the grounding system. Test by means of the [fall-of-potential][two
terminal or direct] method per IEEE Standard 81.
a. Testing Instrument: Battery-powered or hand-cranked AC tester.
i. Indicates ground resistance in ohms from digital decade switches when

the unit’s self-contained meter indicates a null condition.
ii. Range: 0.01 ohm to 9,990 ohms in four overlapping ranges.
iii. Null condition occurs when no current flows through the potential

electrodes.
iv. Instrument Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent or greater.
v. Manufacturer: Biddle Instruments Model 250241 (battery powered) or
250220-2 (hand-cranked) Megger Null Balance Earth Tester.
b. Fall-of-Potential Test (Intersecting Slope Method):
i. Connect instrument as shown on the Drawings.

ii. Place Rod P2 at various locations in line between the tested electrode
and Probe C2 and plot the results on a graph (distance versus
resistance). Take sufficient readings to yield a portion of the plotted
curve as being constant (rate-of-resistance change becomes so small
with respect to distance as to be insignificant).
c. Two-Terminal Test (Direct Method):
i. Connect jumper between terminals C1 and P1 and between C2 and P2.

ii. Connect terminal P1 and C1 to the electrode under test. Connect P2
and C2 to an all metallic water pipe system extensive enough to have a
negligible resistance and metallic throughout, without insulating
couplings or flanges.
d. Conduct two separate tests on opposite sides of the grounding grid.

e. Report failure to obtain specified ground resistance to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
f. Test report shall be in writing, and shall show temperature, humidity, and
condition of the soil at the time of the tests.
C. Section 16124, Medium-Voltage Cables:
1. Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.

2. Verify cable is connected according to the Drawings and shield grounding, cable
support, and terminations are properly installed.
3. DC High-Potential Test:
a. Perform high-potential tests on 5, 15, 25, and 35 kV cable after installation

in accordance with ICEA S-93-639 / NEMA WC74, ANSI/IEEE
Standard 400 and IEEE Standard 576.
b. Perform tests in the presence of the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
Test each length of each phase of cable in the system after installation, with
splices and terminations in place but disconnected from equipment.
c. Use the data sheets at the end of this Section to record the results of DC
high-potential test, or if approved by the EMPLOYER’S
REPPRESENTATIVE, use the data sheets provided by the testing
company.
d. The voltage may be increased continuously or in steps to the maximum test
value. If increased continuously, apply the test voltage at a uniform rate,
increasing to maximum voltage in not less than 10 seconds or more than
60 seconds. If applied in steps, increase the test voltage from one step to
the next in approximately five to eight equal steps. Make the duration of
each step long enough for the absorption current to attain reasonable
stabilization (1 minute).
4. Record current and voltage readings at the end of each step on 5, 15, 25 or 35
kV cable high-potential test data sheets included in this Section; prepare a
written copy of the test data for submission to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE and include in the operations and maintenance manual.

Test company forms may be substituted for the data sheets in this Section, if
they include, at a minimum, the same information.
5. Immediately following these tests, ground the conductor to drain any charge to
earth. GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall replace cables and terminations not
passing the test.
D. Section 16231, Packaged Engine Generators:
1. Test the system per the manufacturer’s recommendation and the requirements in
Section 16231 along with the following:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect for physical damage.

b. Compare nameplate information and connection with Drawings and
Specifications.
c. Inspect for proper anchorage and grounding.
2. Electrical and mechanical tests:
a. Perform an insulation-resistance test on generator winding with respect to

ground in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43. Determine polarization
index.
b. Test protective relay devices in accordance with applicable portions of this
Section.
c. Perform phase rotation test to determine compatibility with load
requirements.
d. Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature,
overspeed, and other features as applicable
e. Perform vibration base-line test. Plot amplitude versus frequency for each
main bearing cap.
f. Perform load bank test in accordance with the following schedule:
g. Perform a cooling system test to validate the engine cooling system.
3. Test values:
a. Perform an insulation-resistance test at minimum test voltage of 1,000

volts. Minimum insulation resistance shall be 100 megohms.
b. Vibration levels shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations and
specification.
c. Load test results shall demonstrate the ability of the unit to deliver rated
load for the test period.
E. Section 16264, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS):
Section 16264.
F. Section 16271, Power Transformers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Check primary, secondary, and ground connections.

b. Clean and inspect bushings.
c. Check accessory devices for condition and proper operation.
d. Liquid-Filled Transformers Only:

i. Inspect bushing clamps and gaskets.

ii. Inspect cover and handhole gasket seals.
iii. Inspect tap changer seals.
iv. Check for oil leaks and external damage to radiators.
v. Check liquid level.
vi. Inspect for damaged insulators and potheads.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform insulation resistance test by meggering transformer windings high

to low and ground, low to high and ground, and high and low to ground.
b. Perform turns ratio test.
c. Where cooling fans have been provided, verify proper operation of same.
d. Power factor test.
e. Liquid-Filled Transformers Only:
i. Test dielectric liquid to ASTM D877, using 25,000 volts minimum

breakdown voltage, after installation and before energizing from
system.
ii. Test transformer to IEEE C57.12.90.
iii. Perform a turns ratio test for each tap position.
f. Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers Only:
i. Test transformer to IEEE C57.12.91.
G. Section 16341, High Tension Switchgear:
1. Switchgear:
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspections:
i. Verify enclosure interiors are cleaned and free of accumulated dust,

dirt, films, and other foreign material.
ii. Inspect and clean all bus and support insulators.
iii. Inspect all electrical and mechanical components for condition and any
evidence of defects or failure.
iv. Check for proper travel and alignment of drawout circuit breakers.
v. Check breaker connections to bus.
vi. Inspect bolted connections. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
torque wrench tighten or remake any questionable connections.
vii. Inspect for missing or loose hardware or accessories.
viii. Inspect ground bus connections.
ix. Operate key and door interlock devices to ensure proper operation.
b. Electrical Tests:
i. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main secondary bus and feeder

circuits phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
ii. Energize any space heater circuits to ensure proper operation.
c. Instruments and Meter Tests: Inspect panel-mounted instruments and

meters. Clean and check for calibration accuracy. Make minor
adjustments, as necessary.
2. Circuit Breakers:

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
i. Remove drawout circuit breaker from cell.

ii. Clean circuit breaker and inspect for defects or damage.
iii. Inspect and check contact alignment.
iv. Inspect finger clusters on line and load stabs.
v. Check for proper mechanical operation. Lubricate where necessary.
vi. Check auxiliary devices for proper operation.
vii. Check breaker racking-device (if applicable) for alignment and friction-
free operation. Lubricate if necessary.
i. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main secondary bus and feeder

circuits phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
ii. Energize any space heater circuits to ensure proper operation.
c. Instruments and Meter Tests: Inspect panel-mounted instruments and

meters. Clean and check for calibration accuracy. Make minor
3. Protective Relays:
i. Remove relay from case. Visually inspect each relay and case for
damaged or broken parts.
ii. Check contact and bearing clearances. Check hardware for tightness.
Check electrical connections for proper contact. Make minor
i. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger each relay circuit to relay frame.

ii. Operational Tests: Calibrate relays to settings provided by the fault
calculation and protective device coordination study provided by the
Owner.
(a) Time Overcurrent Relays
(1) Test minimum pickup.

(2) Test the minimum timing points at three times tap value and at
five times tap value unless otherwise specified.
(3) Test pickup of instantaneous trip attachment, if applicable.
(4) Check operation of target indicator.
(b) Directional Overcurrent Relays:
(1) Test operation of directional units in tripping and nontripping

directions at rated current and voltage.
(2) Test time overcurrent unit as described for time overcurrent
relays above.
(c) Voltage-Controlled Overcurrent Relays:

(1) Test dropout of voltage unit.

(2) Test time overcurrent unit as described for time overcurrent
relays above.
(d) Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays:
(1) Test pickup of each coil by itself.

(2) Apply equal current to opposing coils to test for balanced or
no-trip condition.
(e) Differential Relays:
(1) Test pickup of relay with current in one restraint coil and
operating coil for each set of windings.
(3) Test current transformer connections and polarities to ensure
proper operation.
iii. After the relays have been tested, they shall be reinstalled in the relay
cases. Each relay circuit shall be tested for proper operation by applying
control power and manually closing the relay contacts to trip the breaker.
H. Section 16410, Disconnect Switches:
a. Inspect cover and case, and check for broken or loose terminals.
b. Operate breaker to check operation.
2. Electrical Tests (all breakers with frames rated 600A and above plus 10 percent
of breakers with frames rated 250A frame to 600A frame):
a. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main poles of breaker pole to pole, from
each pole to ground, and across the open contacts of each pole.
b. Contact Resistance Test: Measure contact resistance in microhms across
main pole contacts with breaker closed and latched to check for good, low-
resistance contact. Investigate any value exceeding 500 microhms or
deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent contacts or similar breakers.
c. Test overcurrent trip device by primary current injection and calibrate to

settings provided on all circuit breakers 600A and larger and 10 percent of
circuit breakers 200A-599A and calibrate to settings provided by A/E.
i. All trip units shall be tested by primary injection.

ii. Static overcurrent trip devices shall be tested per manufacturer’s
instructions.
iii. Test for minimum pickup current.
iv. Apply 300 percent of pickup current and measure time necessary to trip
breaker (long-time delay).
v. Where short-time delay characteristics are provided, test short-time
pickup and delay.
vi. Test instantaneous trip by passing current sufficiently high to trip breaker
instantaneously.
vii. Where ground fault protection is provided, test ground fault pickup and
delay.

viii. Check reset characteristics of trip unit.
d. For the 10 percent group of breakers tested, if one of these breakers fails the
test, then 10 more breakers shall be tested.
I. Section 16415, Transfer Switches:
Section 16412.
J. Section 16430, Switchgears:
a. Verify enclosure interiors are cleaned and free of accumulated dust, dirt, oil
films, and other foreign material.
b. Inspect all electrical and mechanical components for condition and any
evidence of defect or failure.
c. Check for proper travel and alignment of any drawout or plug-in circuit
breakers.
d. Check breaker connections to bus.
e. Inspect bolted connections. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall torque
wrench tighten or remake any questionable connections.
f. Inspect for missing or loose hardware or accessories.
g. Inspect ground bus connections.
h. Operate key and door interlock devices to ensure proper operation.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main secondary bus and feeder circuits
phase to phase and phase to ground.
b. Energize any space heater circuits to ensure proper operations.
3. Circuit Breakers:
i. Remove each drawout type circuit breaker.

ii. Inspect arc chutes of power circuit breakers.
iii. Inspect circuit breaker for defects or damage.
iv. Inspect and check contacts. Check alignment, overtravel, and pressure.
Adjust if necessary.
v. Inspect finger clusters on line and load stabs of drawout circuit breakers.
vi. Check for proper mechanical operation. Lubricate where necessary.
vii. Check auxiliary devices for proper operation.
viii. Check breaker racking-device (if applicable) for alignment and friction-
free operation. Lubricate if necessary.
i. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main poles of breaker pole to pole,

from each pole to ground, and across the open contacts of each pole.
ii. Contact Resistance Test: Measure contact resistance in microhms
across main pole contacts with breaker closed and latched to check for
good, low-resistance contact. Investigate any value exceeding
500 microhms or deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent contacts
or similar breakers.

iii. Test overcurrent trip device by primary injection and calibrate to

settings provided by A/E. Static overcurrent trip devices shall be tested
per the manufacturer’s instructions. Test each pole of the breaker
individually. Data shall be compared with manufacturer’s published
data.
(a) Test for minimum pickup current.

(b) Apply 300 percent of pickup current and measure time necessary to
trip breaker (long-time delay).
(c) Where short-time delay characteristics are provided, test short-time
pickup and delay.
(d) Test instantaneous trip by passing current sufficiently high to trip
breaker instantaneously.
(e) Where ground fault protection is provided, test ground fault pickup
and delay.
(f) Check reset characteristics of trip unit.
c. Electrically test any auxiliary devices, such as shunt trips, undervoltage trips,
alarm contacts, and auxiliary contacts.
Section 16442, Panelboards/Section 16443, Motor Control Centers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection - Circuit Breakers:
a. Inspect cover and case, and check for broken or loose terminals.
b. Operate breaker several times to check proper operation.
c. Glastic and phenolic components to be inspected for cracks.
d. Contacts, shunts, etc to be visually inspected for alignment.
2. Electrical Tests - Circuit Breakers (all breakers with frames rated 600A and
above plus 10 percent of breakers with frames rated 200A through 599A). For
CPS and emergency power switchboard and panelboards, test all main circuit
breakers regardless of size:
a. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main poles of breaker pole to pole, from
each pole to ground, and across the open contacts of each pole.
b. Contact Resistance Test: Measure contact resistance in microhms across
main pole contacts with breaker closed and latched to check for good, low
resistance contact. Investigate any value exceeding 500 microhms or
deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent contacts or similar breakers.
c. For the 10 percent group of breakers tested, if one of these breakers fails the
test, then 10 more breakers shall be tested.
d. Test overcurrent trip device by primary current injection and calibrate to
settings provided on all circuit breakers 600A and larger and 10 percent of
circuit breakers 200A-599A.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train EMPLOYER’S maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the electrical equipment and systems.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Raceways and Boxes SECTION 16110
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 STANDARDS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .............................................................................................. 1
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS .......................................................................................................... 1
2.3 W IREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS....................................................................................... 2
2.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES ...................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 4
3.2 W IREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS....................................................................................... 5
3.3 CABLE TRAY/TRUNKING/LADDER ............................................................................................. 5
3.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES ...................................................................................... 5
3.5 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS ................................................................................................... 6
3.6 APPLICATION OF BOXES OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES ................................................... 7
3.7 SLEEVES............................................................................................................................... 7

CD\P06\Electrical\16110-Raceways and Boxes.doc
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide raceways and boxes in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. PS
B. PEC (Part 1 & Part 2) – Latest Edition
C. ANSI
D. UL
E. NEMA
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Conduit, Boxes, Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Manufacturer’s product data sheets
2. Samples
1.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Mark junction box covers with permanent stencil identification of panelboard and circuit
numbers of wiring contained within.
B. Paint fire alarm and life safety system boxes red.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Refer to Section 16007.
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Intermediate Metal Conduit:
1. Rigid conduit, heavy wall, hot dipped galvanized inside and out, threaded ends.
2. Threaded type fittings.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing:
1. Continuous, seamless steel tubing galvanized or sherardized on exterior, coated

on interior with smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel.
2. Steel, set screw or compression type fittings. Provide concrete type fittings
where required.

C. Flexible Steel Conduit:
1. Single strip, continuous, flexible interlocked double-wrapped steel, hot dip

galvanized inside and out forming smooth internal wiring channel.
2. Steel, compression type fittings.
D. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit:
1. Same as flexible steel conduit except with tough, inert, watertight plastic outer
jacket.
2. Fittings shall be cast malleable iron body and gland nut, cadmium plated with
one-piece brass grounding bushings threaded to interior of conduit. Spiral
molded vinyl sealing ring between gland nut and bushing and nylon insulated
throat.
E. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: (Not used)
1. Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride suitable for 90C.
2. Solvent cemented type fittings.
F. Cable Tray/Trunking/Ladder:
1. Cable tray systems shall consist of straight sections, fittings, and required and
classified as equipment grounding conductors. Provide radiused elbows, tees,
crosses, splice plates, wall and overhead supports, and other fittings necessary
for a complete, continuously grounded system.
2. Cable Trunking: Shall be fabricated from electrogalvanised sheet steel having a

nominal thickness of 1.6mm. Trunking and fittings shall have protection against
corrosion painted with at least one coat of rust preventive paint. Finish shall be
oven baked electrostatically coated epoxy paint.
3. Ladder: Ladder type trays shall consists of two longitudinal members (siderails)
with transverse members (rungs) welded to the siderails. Rungs shall be spaced
15 cm on center. Rung spacing in radiused fittings shall be 22 cm measured at
the center of the trays width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable bearing surface
of 20 mm with radiused edges. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the
bottom plane of the siderails.
4. Provide provision for proper grounding terminations for system/equipment

grounding.
G. Loading capacity shall meet the specification requirements to include weight of cables
installed plus a safety factor of 1.5.
H. Use Standard fittings as manufactured by manufacturers. Site modified fittings are not
acceptable.
2.3 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Sizes and shapes as indicated and/or as required. Gauge 16 minimum.
B. Provide necessary elbows, tees, connectors, adapters, etc.
C. Continuous removable cover secured with screws and keyhole slots. Hinged cover
where installed above suspended ceiling.

D. Provide wire retainers at not greater than 30 cm on center.
2.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Cast Type Boxes:
1. Ferrous alloy box with inside threaded hubs for rigid steel conduit.
2. Cast raised cover, size matched to contour of box.
3. Tapered threads for hubs.
B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes:
1. General:
a. Pressed steel, galvanized or cadmium-plated, 10 cm minimum deep

type octagonal or square with galvanized cover or extension ring as
required. Gauge 16 minimum.
2. Concrete Box:
a. 10 cm minimum octagonal with removable back-plate. Depth of box

shall allow for minimum of 25 mm of concrete to be poured around
the backplate.
3. Lighting Fixture Box:
a. 10 cm minimum deep type octagon. Gauge 16 minimum.
b. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling and a

modular wiring system is not used, provide a junction box and extend
flexible steel conduit to each fixture.
4. Provide 10 mm no bolt fixture studs where required.
C. Sheet Steel Boxes:
1. No. 12 gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side less than 1 meter and
maximum area not exceeding 6,500 square cm; riveted or welded 20 mm
flanges at exterior corners.
2. No. 10 gauge sheet steel for boxes with maximum side 1 meter to 1.5 meters
and maximum area 6,500 to 10,000 square cm; riveted or welded 20 mm
flanges at exterior corners.
3. No. 10 gauge sheet steel riveted or welded to 40 mm x 40 mm x 6 mm welded

angle iron framework for boxes with maximum side exceeding 1.5 meter and
more than 10,000 square cm in area.
4. Covers:
a. Same gauge steel as box.
b. Subdivided single covers so no section of cover exceeds 23 kg.
c. Machine bolts or machine screws threaded into tapped holes.

5. Paint:
a. Rust inhibiting primer, ANSI 61 gray enamel finish coat.
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide raceways for all systems. Provide insulated grounding conductor in metallic or
non-metallic raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 20 mm internal diameter. Wiring
of each type and system shall be installed in separate raceways.
B. Branch circuit conduits or wiring device conduits for miscellaneous systems shall not be
installed below slab on grade or embedded within floor slabs in tenant areas.
C. Locate raceways so that the integrity of structural members is not affected and they do
not conflict with the services of other trades. Draw up couplings and fittings full and tight.
Protect threads from corrosion after installation with zinc chromate or equivalent
protection.
D. Conceal raceways except at surface mounted cabinets and freestanding equipment.

Provide flashing and counter-flashing for waterproofing of raceways which penetrate the
roof. Route exposed raceways and raceways above suspended ceilings parallel or
perpendicular to building lines with right angle turns and symmetrical bends. Provide
sleeves in concrete walls, floor slabs and partitions. Waterproof sleeved raceways
where required.
E. Provide raceway expansion joints for exposed and concealed raceways at expansion
joints and between structures to compensate for differential movement. Provide bonding
conductor.
F. Provide one empty 20 mm raceway for each three spare unused poles or spaces of
flush-mounted panel boards. Terminate conduit in an accessible location for future
extension.
G. Provide raceways with appropriate seal-offs, explosion-proof fittings, etc. in special

occupancy areas as required. Provide conduit seal-offs where portions of an interior
raceway system pass through walls, ceiling or floors which separate adjacent rooms
having substantially different maintained temperatures, refrigeration or cold storage
rooms.
H. Provide pull cord in empty raceways. Tag both ends noting destination.
I. Clear raceway of all obstructions and dirt prior to pulling in wires or cables. Use ball
mandrel (diameter approximately 85% of conduit inside diameter) followed by close
fitting wire brush and wad of felt or similar material. This assembly may be pulled with,
but ahead of cable being installed. Clean empty raceways similarly. Clear or replace
any raceway which rejects ball mandrel.
J. Secure raceway clamps or supports to masonry materials with toggle bolts, expansion
bolts or steel inserts. Install raceway on steel construction with approved clamps which
do not depend on friction or set-screw pressure alone.
K. Raceways Above Suspended Ceilings:
1. Single runs of 15 mm or 20 mm raceways may be supported from ceiling

support wires where permitted by the rating of the ceiling system.

2. Provide independent support of raceways larger than 20 mm. Provide

independent support of multiple raceways (more than one). Provide uni-strut
support and threaded rod to structure above. Attachment to ceiling support
wires is not permitted.
3. Provide independent support of raceways installed above fire rated ceilings.

Attachment to ceiling support wires is not permitted.
4. Install conduit 30 cm minimum above top of ceiling.
L. Conduit connected to rotating or vibrating equipment shall be flexible metal conduit or

liquid tight flexible conduit.
3.2 WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Install wire ways above suspended ceilings such that cover will hinge upward from side.
B. Provide 30 mm clear from wire way cover when in open position.
3.3 CABLE T RAY/T RUNKING/L ADDER
A. Cable Raceway shall be supported at a maximum of 1.5 meters on center and at each
bend, tee, cross and elbow fitting. Supports shall be threaded rod trapeze style hangers
or wall brackets. Side rails shall bear on the supports; rungs shall not bear on the
supports.
B. Cable Raceway shall be installed level. Manufactured offsets shall be used to change
height or direction.
C. Coordinate location of cable raceway with other trades to avoid conflicts and maintain
accessibility. Where installed above ceiling, cable trays shall be not less than 30 cm
above the bottom of the finished ceiling. Vertical clearance above the tray shall be a
minimum of 30 cm.
D. Cable Raceway shall be continuous. Where cable raceway run is interrupted at a fire
rated wall, provide three 10 cm sleeves in fire rated wall. Provide bonding jumpers where
cable trays are interrupted at fire rated walls and floors or are otherwise rendered
electrically discontinuous.
E. Cable raceway installed in an environmental air plenum shall be solid bottom with
continuous cover, rated for installation in an environmental air plenum.
3.4 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Provide outlet, junction and pull boxes as indicated and as required for a complete
installation and to facilitate proper pulling of wires and cables. Boxes shall be sized per
electrical code as minimum. Plug open knock outs.
B. The exact location of outlets and equipment is governed by field conditions. Where
necessary, relocate outlets so that fixtures and equipment are symmetrically located in
accordance with the room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment.
Verify final location of outlets, fixtures and equipment with Architect.
C. Back-to-back outlets in the same wall, or "through-wall" type boxes are not permitted.
Provide 30 mm minimum spacing for outlets shown on opposite sides of a common wall.
Provide acoustical potting compound on outlet boxes installed in private offices and
conference rooms.

D. Fit outlet boxes in finished ceilings or wall with appropriate covers, set flush with the
finished surface. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use
multiple gang boxes and covers. Provide tile box or a 10 mm square box with tile ring in
masonry walls not plastered or furred. Where drywall material is utilized, provide plaster
ring. Provide outlet boxes of type and size suitable for the specific application. Provide
barriers where required for voltage or systems separation.
E. Provide pull boxes so that an individual run of conduit does not contain more than the
equivalent of 2 ninety degree bends (180 degrees total).
3.5 APPLICATION OF RACEWAYS
A. Intermediate Metal Conduit:
1. General purpose feeders and branch circuits for power and lighting
2. FDAS, IDACS, CCTV, CSAS, ITSS, ITSS-CCR
B. Flexible Steel Conduit:
1. Dry locations only.
2. Connections for wiring feed to furniture wiring management system.
3. Connections to lighting fixtures in suspended ceilings.
4. Connections to equipment installed suspended ceilings.
5. Transformer connections.
6. Connections to equipment where vibration isolation is needed.
7. Maximum length shall be 1000mm.
8. Bus way/Bus Duct plug-in units.
C. Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit:
1. Same as flexible steel conduit in damp or wet locations.
2. Motor connections.
3. Raceway system under raised floor of computer/server rooms
D. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Where indicated.
2. Above and below panelboards, lighting relay cabinets and terminal cabinets to
accommodate large concentrations of wires.
E. Cable Trays/Trunking/Ladder:
1. Low Voltage Feeders.
2. Medium Voltage armored cable feeders.
3. Exposed and accessible locations shall be solid bottom type cable tray.

4. Structured Cabling System
3.6 APPLICATION OF BOXES OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Cast Type Boxes:
1. Where connected to rigid steel, intermediate metal, rigid aluminum conduit and
liquid tight flexible conduit, 30 mm and smaller.
2. Exposed conduit installations within 3 meters above finished floor.
3. Where exposed to moisture and outdoors.
B. Galvanized Pressed Steel Type Boxes:
1. Where connected to electrical metallic tubing and flexible steel conduit, 30 mm

and smaller.
2. Dry locations.
3. Where concealed in walls and above suspended ceilings.
C. Sheet Steel Boxes:
1. Where connected to conduit larger than 32mmØ.
D. Special Outlet Boxes for Data and Communications
1. Provide steel wall boxes complete with plaster rings and conduit box gland
fitting and single plastic grommet – to be installed by the data and
Communications Contractor.
3.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves shall be 10 cm rigid steel nipples. Extend floor sleeves a minimum of 10 cm

above and below finished floor. Extend wall sleeves a minimum of 10 cm on either side
of wall. Sleeve ends shall be threaded.
B. Provide sleeves between floors of telecommunication closets as in quantities and

locations shown on the Drawings.
C. Fire seal floor sleeves and sleeves in fire rated walls to maintain fire rating of wall after
telephone cables are installed.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Conductors and Cables SECTION 16120
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS.......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.6 COORDINATION...................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .................................................................................................... 2
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES .................................................................................................... 2
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES ........................................................................................................... 2
2.4 SLEEVE SEALS ...................................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS .................................................................................... 3
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND W IRING METHODS.... 3
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ........................................................................... 4
3.4 CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 4
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS ........................................................... 4
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................... 5
3.7 FIRESTOPPING....................................................................................................................... 5

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16120-Conductors
and Cables.doc
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section Voice and Data Communication Cabling” for cabling used for
voice and data circuits.
2. Division 16 Section 16124 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and

multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution
systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

and Cables.doc
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in PEC,
Article 1.0, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with PEC.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as
they are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers”.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW and HHN-THWN.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable, Type AC with ground
wire.
E. Fire Rated Cable: Comply with IEC-331 and passed BS 6387 with highest categories CWZ.
C = 950ºC for 3 hours

W = 650ºC fire with water
Z = 950ºC fire with mechanical shock
Fire rated cable shall be rated for 3 hours low acid, low corrosive gas emission and low or
zero halogen (low smoke emission and non-toxic)
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers”.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material,

type, and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-
inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

and Cables.doc
2.4 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between sleeve and cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or
conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Plastic, Carbon steel Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing
element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating, Stainless
steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one
for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR I NSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway Armored cable,

Type AC.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,

single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-

THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN in

raceway.
I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN-THWN in raceway.
J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with
stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
M. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

and Cables.doc
N. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
O. All feeder of life safety load shall be fire rated or as indicated on the plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that
will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic

Restraints."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess
equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE I NSTALLATION F OR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or
formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater
than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1
or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138
inch (3.5 mm).

and Cables.doc
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during
construction of floor or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different
clearance.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with
approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between
sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint
according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type

flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material
and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install
in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

and Cables.doc
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the
following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors
No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible
to portable scanner.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide
calibration record for device.
c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION

and Cables.doc
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Isolated Power Systems SECTION 16135
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 STANDARDS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 RELATED W ORK .................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS...................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................... 2
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................ 4
3.2 FIELD TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 5

CD\P06\Electrical\16135-Isolated Power Systems.doc
SECTION 16135
ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the isolated power
systems.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. Philippine Electrical Code (PEC)
B. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code, Article 517
C. NFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities
D. UL1022 – Line Isolation Monitors
E. UL1047 – Isolated Power System Distribution Equipment
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16010, Electrical General Provision: General electrical requirements and items
that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
B. Section 16051, Conduits for cables and wiring, 600V Wire and Cable
C. Section 16110, Raceways & Boxes:
D. Section 16060, Grounding System: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a
low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit in accordance with Section 1 6010, Electrical General Provision
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine

compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting details, front view, side
view, equipment and device arrangement, branch circuit overcurrent protection,
wiring diagrams, materials and connection diagrams.
B. Manuals: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Engineer:
1. Complete maintenance, operating and testing manuals including wiring

diagrams, technical data sheets and information for ordering replaceable parts:
a. Include complete “As Installed” diagrams which indicate all items of

equipment and their interconnecting wiring.

b. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each of the items of
equipment, including “As Installed” revisions of the diagrams.
c. The wiring diagrams shall identify the terminals to facilitate installation,
maintenance, operation and testing.
C. Certification: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to
the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the equipment conforms to the

requirements of the drawings and specifications.
2. Certification by the manufacturer of the isolated electrical power system
equipment, that the isolating transformers have been tested and conform to the
leakage current and sound level requirements specified.
3. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed,
adjusted, and tested.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Isotrol System and Square D
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Isolated electrical power systems shall be complete as shown on the drawings and
include unitized isolated power units (IPU’s), and associated remote outlets, power
receptacles, grounding receptacles, equipotential ground bus modules with power
and grounding receptacles, monitors, and related circuitry.
B. All components used in fabricating the isolated electrical power system and the
unitized isolated power units (IPU’s) shall bear the label of the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. In the absence of the label on the unitized isolated power units
(IPS’s), submit four copies of certifications by the manufacturer that the unit is
scheduled for evaluations by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
C. Incorporate the IPU’s in factory-assembled units as shown on the detail drawings.

House the isolation transformer, line isolation monitor, and circuit breaker panelboard
in each IPU.
D. Line isolation monitors (LIM)
1. LIM shall be accordance with Article, “Line Isolation Monitor”, in NFPA 99.
2. The LIM shall use microprocessor-based digital signal processing to
continually monitor the impedance from all secondary conductors of the
isolated power systems to ground. The LIM shall be capable of measuring
all combinations of capacitive and resistive faults including balanced,
unbalanced and hybrid faults. LIMs which internally switch between either
line and ground will not be accepted. The LIM shall not contribute more than
15A to the total hazard current of the system being monitored.
3. The LIM shall have the following specifications:
a. Operating voltage 85 to 265 VAC

b. Accuracy 5% or better
c. Alarm level 2 or 5 mA (selectable)

d. Alarm bandwidth Zero (0)
4. The LIM shall have a green safe light and red hazard light on the front panel.
The red hazard light shall remain illuminated for the duration when the isolated
power system hazard current is above the selected alarm level of the LIM. An
audible alarm shall be incorporated into the unit and shall activate in
conjunction with the red hazard light. The audible alarm shall have high, low,
and off settings. A silence button shall be provided on the face of the unit to
silence the audible alarm during fault conditions. Upon silencing the audible
alarm, a yellow indicating light shall illuminate to indicate the audible alarm
has been silenced. The red hazard light and yellow silence light shall
automatically reset when the fault condition is eliminated. During fault
conditions, the red hazard light and all red segments to the LED bar graph
shall blink at a constant rate. All lamps are to be long life LED type.
5. All switches, meters, and indicating lamps shall be flush with the face of the
LIM to provide a neat and clean appearance. The entire front face of the unit
shall have a polymer overlay that protects the unit from the intrusion of
housekeeping cleaning agents. LIMs with exposed fuses, meters, switches, or
circuit breakers will not be accepted.
E. Isolating transformers:
1. Published ratings as shown on the drawings. These ratings are for

continuous duty without the use of cooling fans.
2. Self-cooled by natural convection, dry, isolating windings, toroidal type or
conventional type with an electrostatic shield between the primary and
secondary windings which is grounded in accordance with NFPA 99. The
electrostatic shield will be designed to prevent direct shorting of the primary
winding to the secondary winding and to reduce the coupling at harmonic
distortions between the primary and secondary circuits.
3. Maximum temperature rises of materials and components shall not exceed
the values listed in Table 29.1 of UL 1047.
4. Cores shall be grain-oriented, silicon steel.
5. Leakage current between each winding and ground shall not exceed the
values shown in Table 29.2 of UL 1047,
6. Sound levels shall not exceed the following in accordance with NEMA
Standards:
a. Up to 5KVA transformers: 27 dB
b. 7.5 to 10 KVA transformers: 35dB
7. Class H rated insulation shall be used in the manufacturer of the transformer

and the temperature rise will be limited to 55oC above ambient under full
load conditions when tested in accordance with NEMA-ANSI standards.
o
Transformer must have a 220 C, UL recognized insulation system.
8. Each nameplate shall include the wiring diagram, leakage current and sound
level.
9. Install the transformers with adequate provisions for removal of the heat
which they produce.
10. Install the transformers so the sound levels shall not exceed the factory test
sound levels for the same transformers.
F. Circuit Breaker Panels:
1. Circuit breaker equipped, dead-front, with protection for the breaker handles.
2. Bus bars:
a. Shall be copper with silver-plated joints.

b. Panel to include ground bus.
3. Only the handles of the breakers shall be accessible.

4. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Dimensions of the breakers shall be small enough so all of the

components can be satisfactorily incorporated within the cabinets.
b. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material.
c. Silver alloy contacts.
d. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.
e. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.
f. A trip element for each pole, a common trip bar for all poles and
molded insulating material handle.
g. Electrically and mechanically trip free.
h. Indicating operating handle showing the ON, TRIPPED and OFF
positions.
5. Type the circuit information on the directory cards and insert into metal
holders with non-flammable transparent covers, mount holder on the inside
of the cabinet covers. Adequately identify each circuit.
G. Power Receptacles:
1. Non-hazardous Areas; Hospital Grade, NEMA 5-20R unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Hazardous Anesthetizing Areas; Industry 24000 Series for Class 1, Division
1, Group C atmospheres.
H. Remote Ground Indicator Panel shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Monitor all of the isolated type electrical power systems as shown on the
drawings.
2. Include as set of red and green indicator lights and a buzzer with a local,
momentary-contact silencing switch or pushbutton for each of the isolated
type electrical power systems monitored by the panel. All of the items shall
operate the same as the corresponding items at the line isolation monitor for
the same isolated type electrical power system.
3. Stainless steel or anodized aluminum faceplates.
I. Clearly identify individual devices on the faceplates of all equipment. Method of

identification shall be permanent so the labels will not be affected by the use of
hospital type cleaning materials.
J. All equipment shall be flush-mounted as shown on the drawings.
K. Use stainless steel for exposed faceplate surfaces of isolated power systems
equipment in operating rooms.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation, NFPA,

NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
B. In rooms where flammable anesthetics are used, mount the equipment so the
bottoms of the enclosures are not less than five feet above the finished floor.

C. Branch circuits which are energized by the isolated type electrical power system shall
conform to the following requirements:
1. Article “Impedance of Isolated Wiring”, in NFPA 99.

2. Not be grounded but be protected by circuit breakers which have one pole
for each conductor in the circuit.
3. Applicable paragraphs in the Section 16120, 600V Wire and Cable.
4. Be as short as practicable to minimize the leakage currents.
5. “Tin” all grounding wires at all terminations.
6. Connect all of the receptacles for each of the systems so identical poles in
all of the receptacles are connected to the same terminal of the isolating
transformer.
7. Install the branch circuit wiring in rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic
tubing. Do not use wire lubricating compound on branch circuits connected
to the isolated power system.
3.2 FIELD T ESTING
A. When the equipment and all of the interconnecting circuits have been completely
installed and prior to the final inspection, provide testing equipment and perform the
following tests, in the presence of the Engineer, to indicated that the systems operate
properly in every respect.
1. Verify, by testing, all of the wiring is properly connected and clear of ground
faults, shorts and open circuit defects.
2. Verify, by testing, all of the equipment is operating properly.
3. Tests:
a. Make a calibration test on each of the micro-ammeters. The shall be

accurate within 3 percent.
b. With all of the circuit breakers closed and without any equipment
plugged into the receptacles, read and record the inherent total
leakage current indicated by the micro-ammeter. The leakage
currents shall be small enough to indicate that all of the equipment
and circuit installations are satisfactory for proper operation of the
equipment. Submit four copies of the certified data sheets of the
test.
c. Demonstrate by an electrical test that either terminal of each of the
isolating transformers, when shorted to ground in one of the power
receptacles, will actuate the ground alarm without causing the circuit
breaker to trip.
d. Demonstrate by an electrical test that either terminal of each of the
isolating transformers, when shorted to ground in one of the power
receptacles, will actuate the ground alarm without causing the circuit
breaker to trip.
e. Connect not less than eight pieces of equipment successively to the
power receptacles for each of the isolated type electrical power
systems. As each item is connected, read and record the total
leakage current indicated by the micro-ammeter. Each of the
readings should be larger than the preceding reading.
f. In addition, perform all test procedures recommended by
manufacturer of the Isolated Power System to supplement the above
tests.
g. Furnish a portable, precision-laboratory quality, test box which is
suitable for making the above tests and includes a multi-position
rotary switch with appropriate resistors and a cord with a plug. Test

box shall be transferred to the Project Manager upon satisfactory

completion of all tests.
4. When any defects are detected, make repairs or install replacement

components and repeat the tests as requested by the Project Manger.
B. At the final inspection, demonstrate that the isolated electrical power systems
operate properly in the presence of a Project Manager representative.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Wiring Devices SECTION 16140
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY........................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................................................................................... 1
1.6 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................ 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES ........................................................................................ 2
2.2 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES............................................................ 2
2.3 TWIST-LOCK RECEPTACLES .............................................................................................. 2
2.4 SNAP SWITCHES .............................................................................................................. 2
2.5 W ALL PLATES .................................................................................................................. 3
2.6 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS ................................................................................................. 3
2.7 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLES ............................................................................................ 3
2.8 MULTIOULET ASSEMBLES .................................................................................................. 3
2.9 SERVICE POLES ............................................................................................................... 4
2.10 FINISHES ......................................................................................................................... 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................................. 4
3.1 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 4
3.2 IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................................ 6
3.3 FILED QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................................................. 6

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16140-Wiring
Devices.doc
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Twist-locking receptacles.
3. Wall-box.
4. Snap switches.
5. Wall-switch.
6. Pendant cord-connector devices.
7. Cord and plug sets.
8. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies and service poles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for
premarking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through
one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring
devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

Devices.doc
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with Philippine Electrical Code (PEC)
E. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

a. NECA - Standard of Installation
F. Comply with National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

a. WD 1- General Color Requirements for wiring devices.
b. WD 6- Wiring Device - Dimensional Requirements.
G. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

a. UL 20 - Wall Dimmers.
b. UL 498 - Switches and Receptacles.
c. UL 943 - Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles.
H. Switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 220 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers”.
2.2 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) L OCATION RECEPTACLES
A. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL
1010.
1. Manufacturers: See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers”.
2.3 T WIST-LOCK RECEPTACLES
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 220 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
2.4 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

Devices.doc
B. Switches, 220 V, 10 A:
2.5 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.6 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum or solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise

indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45
Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.
2.7 POKE-T HROUGH ASSEMBLES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers See Section 16007 “Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers”.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with

multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service
outlet assembly.
1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two
RJ-45 jacks.
2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to
floor thickness.
3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and
reestablish fire rating of floor.
5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG
conductors and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data
communication cables.
2.8 MULTIOULET ASSEMBLES

Devices.doc
B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a

complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish or PVC whichever is

applicable.
D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.
2.9 SERVICE POLES
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data
communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near
floor.
1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- (65-mm-) square cross section, with height adequate to
extend from floor to at least 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling, and with separate
channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling.
2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection
to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.
3. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination.
4. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a
minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 3 or 5 voice and data communication cables.
5. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, heavy-duty, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R
units.
6. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Two RJ-45 Category 5e jacks.
2.10 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by ARCHITECT,

unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.
4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless
otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall
finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are
guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete,
dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors,
and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a
joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

Devices.doc
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.
Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large
enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the
last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152
mm) in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap
solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally

mounted receptacles to the right.
2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral
blade at the top.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall
opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions
and furnishings.

Devices.doc
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 FILED QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 209 to 264 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 10-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not
acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or
similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace
with new ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Test straight blade convenience outlets in patient-care areas, hospital-grade convenience

outlets for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force
shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).
END OF SECTION

Devices.doc
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Engine Generator Sets Section 16200
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 W ORK INCLUDED ................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 STANDARDS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 LOCATION CRITERIA/REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 SYSTEM TESTING ................................................................................................................... 3
1.7 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 ACCEPTABLE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................ 4
2.2 ENGINE................................................................................................................................. 4
2.3 ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 5
2.4 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 5
2.5 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM........................................................................................... 6
2.6 EXHAUST STACK.................................................................................................................... 6
2.7 FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................ 6
2.8 SOUND TRAPS/ATTENUATORS ................................................................................................. 7
2.9 ALTERNATOR ......................................................................................................................... 7
2.10 ENGINE-GENERATOR CONTROL: .............................................................................................. 8
2.11 AUTOMATIC STARTING CIRCUIT ............................................................................................... 9
2.12 ENGINE GENERATOR SET PERFORMANCE................................................................................. 9
2.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ..................................................................... 10
2.14 SYSTEM OPERATION ............................................................................................................ 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 10
3.2 TESTS & INSPECTION ........................................................................................................... 10
3.3 STARTUP TEST .................................................................................................................... 11
3.4 POWER SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST ...................................................................................... 12
3.5 TURNOVER DOCUMENTS/CLOSE -OUT ................................................................................... 13
3.6 RECORD DRAWINGS............................................................................................................. 14
3.7 FINAL PUNCHLIST................................................................................................................. 14
3.8 SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................ 14

SECTION 16200
ENGINE GENERATOR SETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Supply, install, delivery, rigging/hauling, field testing and commissioning of Engine

Generator Sets (Third Party Testing Agency).
B. Provide Engine Generator Sets in accordance with the Contract Documents.
A. The Generator Set Supplier shall have local representation and shall have been
actively engaged in installation and service of generator sets for a period of not less
than 10 years.
B. The Generator Set Suppliers shall have full parts backup and 24 hour per day
service availability for this equipment.
C. The Generator Set Supplier shall review the fuel system design and certify that the
installation meets the engine manufacturer's requirements and will allow for proper
operation of the generator set at full rated load.
D. The Generator Set Supplier shall review the cooling system and acoustic design and
certify that the installation meets the engine manufacturer's requirements and will
allow for proper operation of the generator set at full rated load.
E. Brand of Protective devices (Circuit Breaker) to be used for the Generator Control
Panel shall be the same brand that of to be supplied by the Panel boards/Paralleling
Switchgear manufacturer or Electrical Contractor. Coordinate this with the Project
Manager.
F. Certified Factory Test Report (CFTR) shall be included on the shipment of the
Generator Sets. The CFTR shall at least cover the requirement of Item 2.13: Engine
Generator Set Performance.
G. The Generator Set shall be “Brand New”. Ex-stocked of year 2008 and below shall
be re-tested based on the requirements of Item 1.2 F and Item 1.3 by the
manufacturer. Notify the Project Manager prior to shipment.
H. Prior to shipment of the Generator Set units including the Generator

Switchboard (Parallel Switchgear), the Contractor shall secure all needed
approvals (e.g. product submittal/shop drawing) including the manufacturer’s
certificate indicating that the Generator Sets were assembled/tested at the Factory
and ready for shipment/and use by the Customer. Point of Origin/Transport
Documentation from the manufacturer shall also be submitted for approval.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. AS 1359, AS 2789
B. ABGSM TM3
C. BS 5514

CD\P06\Electrical\16200-Engine Generator Sets.doc
D. DIN 6271, DIN 6280
E. EGSA 101P
F. JEM 1359
G. IEC 34/1
H. ISO 3046/1, ISO DIS 8528
I. NEMA MG1-22
1.4 LOCATION CRITERIA/REQUIREMENTS
1. Altitude: 46,000mm above sea level
2. Ambient Temperature: 20C to 50C
3. Ambient Humidity: 50 to 99% RH
4. Seismic: United States UBC Zone 4 equivalent
5. Noise Attenuation: DENT, DOT and LGU requirement
6. NOx and Black Smoke: DENR, DOT and LGU requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed drawing of the Engine Generator Set with dimensioned locations of

components and external connections and attachments. Indicate position of shell and
tube heat exchanger.
B. Engine manufacturer's specifications, performance data, certified power output

curves, and certified fuel consumption and vibration-noise curves/data.
C. Calculations certifying that the net engine horsepower is equal to or greater than 1.45
horsepower per kilowatt less parasitic loads at specified ambient conditions with
engine manufacturer's supporting data.
D. Exhaust System Back Pressure Calculations certifying that the engine exhaust
system with proposed silencer and piping as indicated on the mechanical drawings
for this installation is within the manufacturer's criteria.
E. Starting battery sizing calculations showing compliance with specifications at ambient

conditions.
F. Drawing showing battery cell and jar connections.
G. Certified vibration isolation, seismic restraint details and product data showing the
number and location of each support and restraint and the exact number, size, and
type of each anchor. Submit for engine generator set, exhaust silencer, over-all
engine noise attenuation and battery rack.
H. Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, and wiring diagrams for each
engine generator system component.

I. Detailed point to point wiring diagrams.
J. Manufacturer's statement that the overall systems design and specification has been
reviewed and is satisfactory for system performance or list of exceptions.
K. Name and location of factory authorized service agency to approve and start up
installation.
L. Name and location of factory authorized service agency to perform warranty and
service work.
M. Name and location of Certified Third Party Testing Agency to perform Field Testing.
N. Certified prototype, Factory, and Field Test Reports.
O. The Contractor shall submit the details of Exhaust System of the Generator Set per
Item 2.5 of Part 2: Product prior to procurement.
1.6 SYSTEM T ESTING
A. Factory Tests
1. Factory tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer.
2. Owner's representatives may elect to witness factory testing. Provide 14

days advance notification.
3. Test alarm points.
4. Test shut-down points.
5. 4 hour, 100% resistive and reactive load test at full rated load and power
factor, and 1 hour at 110% load.
a. Monitor voltage stability

b. Monitor frequency stability
c. Apply and remove load in 25% increments
6. Oscillograph chart recordings of voltage and frequency of generator set

transient performance for 100% step load addition and subtraction indicating
compliance with specifications.
7. Equipment shall be Prototype Test Supported certified.
B. Field Tests
1. Field tests shall be conducted by Factory certified technicians.
2. Field inspection and testing shall occur after installation is complete and the
room is secure.
3. Test engine start circuits, time delay circuits, status points, and system
control points.
4. Perform 2 hour load at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% full resistive load test using a
temporary load bank. Unsuccessful tests shall be fully documented,

submitted, and re-tested until successful. Record and monitor noise level
within and outside the generator set room.
1.7 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Engine Generator Set Supplier shall provide a minimum of two days of
operating instructions on maintenance and operation of the emergency power
system. (Engine , Alternator and Generator Control Panel). Classes shall be open to
up to three representatives of the Owner's maintenance staff. Instructions shall be
administered by a full time employee of the manufacturer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS
A. Diesel Engine: Caterpillar, Detroit Diesel, Mitsubishi, Cummins or Perkins.
B. Exhaust Silencer: Cowl, Maxim, or Nelson or Silex.
C. Vibration Isolators: Mason Industries , Vibration Eliminator or Silex.
D. Batteries: C & D, Exide, or Nife.
E. Battery Charger: LaMarche, Onan, , Sens or Master Control System.
F. Generator: AVK, Caterpillar, Kato, Leroy Somer, Marathon, or Stamford.
G. Governor: Woodward.
H. Voltage Regulator: Basler or Stamford-Newage.
I. Circuit Breakers: ABB, General Electric, Cuttler Hammer, Siemens, or Square D.
J. Acoustic louvers/Attenuators: NAP Silent Flo or approved equal.
2.2 ENGINE
A. The engine shall be Brand New. Ex-stocked of year 2008 and below is subject to
approval by the Engineers and the Owners.
B. The engine shall run on number 2 diesel fuel, 1800 RPM, compression ignition type,
four stroke cycle, water cooled, solid injection, either vertical in-line or vee
configuration.
C. The net brake horsepower of the engine at rated operating speed shall be not less
than 1.45 times the rated standby electric kilowatt rating of the engine generator. Net
brake horsepower is defined as the horsepower that the fully de-rated bare engine
can deliver less all parasitic loads.
D. Fuel consumption of the engine generator shall be substantiated by means of

manufacturer's certified curves.

E. The engine shall be equipped with an electronic governor to maintain engine speed
within specified limits. Governor shall be adjustable from isochronous to five percent
droop. Frequency shall be factory set at rated frequency. Governor shall be
Woodward 2301 or approved equal.
F. Engine safety devices, including high water temperature switch, over-speed sensing
switch, low oil pressure switch, low water temperature switch, and other required
devices, shall be mounted on the engine and connected to the control and status
panel instruments and alarms as specified herein.
G. Engine wiring shall be of industrial quality, heat resistant, insulated, copper

conductors. Wiring shall be protected and shall be isolated from high temperature
engine parts. Wiring for alternating current power circuits shall installed in conduit.
H. The engine shall be provided with Turbo charger.
2.3 ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
A. Provide an engine mounted electric starting motor with solenoid and over-running
clutch drive. The starting motor shall be of the required voltage and ampere rating.
B. Provide a system of lead acid batteries sized such that the engine generator set may
complete five, twenty second complete cranking cycles at firing speed and specified
room temperature. Provide a seismic rack and cables of sufficient ampacity.
C. Provide a (built-in) 220V AC battery charger, which shall recharge battery to full
capacity within eight hours. Battery charger shall have both a high rate and float rate
charging system. The battery charger shall be current limiting and shall not require
cranking cutout contacts for charger protection when cranking. Accessories shall
include: DC ammeter, fused input, DC voltmeter, high/low DC output voltage relay,
and input voltage failure relay. Battery charger output shall be rated ten amperes
minimum at required voltage. Controls to adjust both the float and equalize voltage
shall be located on the front of the charger. Charger current level shall automatically
drop to a sufficiently low level to eliminate overcharging of the batteries.
D. Provide a Battery Charger with malfunction alarm modules to meet NFPA 110
(Indicate loss of line current, low battery voltage, or charger failure).
E. The entire electric starting system shall be rated for 24 or 32V DC operation as
recommended by the manufacturer.
2.4 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. The engine shall be provided with Engine - mounted radiator and blower type fan,
sized to provide adequate cooling and safe operation at 50oC maximum ambient
temperature. The radiator fan shall be sized at the manufacturer’s rated air flow at
190 Pa external static pressure excluding the pressure drop through the radiator with
50 oC entering air temperature. Suitable expansion space, either by means of surge
tanks or radiator top tank shall be provided. The cooling system shall allow proper
de-rating for the engine. An engine driven propeller type fan shall be provided.
Engine coolant shall be a mixture of fifty (50) percent water. A duct adaptor flange
shall be included for flex connection.
B. The engine shall be equipped with a centrifugal type water circulating pump and
thermostat valve to maintain the engine at recommended temperature level.
C. The engine cooling system shall include one or more spin-on type engine water

filters which will treat the coolant and prevent corrosion and scale deposits inside the
cooling system.
2.5 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Provide an air cleaner / silencer as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Air

cleaners shall be dry type with replaceable elements.
B. Engine exhaust outlets shall be coupled to the System of Item 2.5 C and to the
exhaust silencers by means of an adequately sized section of stainless steel
corrugated flex. Flex connector(s) shall be flanged at both ends for mating to the
engine and exhaust system.
C. Exhaust silencers shall be super critical grade at critical range of 35 dBA attenuation
and shall be sized to limit exhaust back pressure to acceptable values. Exhaust
silencers shall be suitable for horizontal mounting, equipped with flanged bottom inlet
and flanged end outlet. The exhaust silencers shall be double wall construction and
shall have a high temperature anti-corrosion coating applied uniformly on the outside
surface.
2.6 EXHAUST STACK
A. Provide standard weight ASTM Specification steel pipe. Weld all joints, except at
connection to muffler discharge pipe where flanges shall be used.
B. Provide 1035 kPa forged steel, welding flange, flanged faced and drilled to conform
to ASA B16.5. Provide asbestos-free high temperature gaskets 1.6 mm thickness.
C. Provide flapper type weather cap at exterior end of stack, manufactured as an

accessory item for the installation. Do not use field-manufactured type. Brand shall
be the same that of the Exhaust Silencer/Muffler.
D. Where piping is exposed to weather, supply two coats of high temperature anti rust
paint.
E. Refer to Mechanical Specification, Section 15255 - Insulation, the insulation material

for exhaust pipe. The bidder/contractor shall coordinate this requirement to the
Project Manager.
F. The exhaust pipe shall be sized in accordance with the allowable engine back
pressure.
2.7 FUEL SYSTEM
A. General
1. Fuel lines between injection pumps and valves shall be heavy seamless B.I.
tubing.
2. Provide fuel filters with replaceable elements. Fuel filters shall be located in
an accessible housing ahead of the injection pumps.
3. Provide an engine driven fuel transfer pump.
4. The generator shall have an on-board fuel cooling system as required to

ensure that the fuel returned to the day tank does not exceed 38oC.

2.8 SOUND T RAPS/ATTENUATORS
A. Construct duct silencers of inorganic, noncombustible materials meeting UL

requirements for flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed 50.
B. The shell of the silencer to be at least 22 gauge galvanized steel and be leak proof
when subjected to a differential pressure of 8 inches w.g. Protect the sound
absorbing materials with 22 gauge perforated galvanized steel. Maximum density of
4.5 pounds per cubic foot glass of mineral fiber.
C. Measure total system pressure upstream and downstream of the sound traps after
they are installed. Should the pressure drop be greater than specified or scheduled,
replace the traps and / or modify the entrance or discharge aerodynamic flow to
achieve the specified results.
D. The sound traps should have straight through air passages to avoid noise
regeneration from airflow turbulence.
E. If sizes of sound attenuators indicated on the drawings are not standard sizes for a
particular manufacturer, sound attenuator of different sizes are acceptable as long as
the design face velocity is not exceeded and subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Combinations of two or more sound attenuators to meet required sizes are also
acceptable.
F. The sound attenuators shall meet the following requirements
1. The sound pressure level measured at not more than 1 meter from air intake
or exhaust louvers (acoustically treated) should not exceed 47-52 dBA.
2. Face dimension of suggested attenuators may be altered to site condition as

long as the pressure drop of attenuators do not exceed the maximum
pressure drop of 50 Pa for both intake and exhaust.
- Max. intake attenuator air face velocity = 6, 4 m/s

- Max. exhaust attenuator air face velocity = 4, 5 m/s
3. Contractor should submit computerized selected, output to confirm required

NC levels are met.
4. Refer to Section 15241: Acoustic – Clause 1.4A: Acoustic Criteria for the
detail requirement.
2.9 ALTERNATOR
A. Engine generator set shall be rated 230VAC, wye connected, three phase, four wire,
60 Hertz, 0.8 power factor, rating as shown on the plan and shall be tested and rated
for stand-by operation.
B. The rated output shall be available for stand-by operation. The stand-by duty
rating shall be in accordance with the following standards:
 ISO 8528
 ISO 3046/1
 AS 2789
 DIN 6271
 BS 5514

The alternator shall be four pole, synchronous brushless type. The alternator shall
be single bearing type coupled directly to the engine flywheel by means of a flexible
disc coupling.
C. The alternator voltage regulator shall be solid-state type, three phase sensing and
shall incorporate an under frequency protective circuit to limit generator excitation at
lower than normal operating speeds. The voltage regulator shall be equipped with a
voltage-adjusting rheostat capable of plus or minus five percent rated voltage
adjustment. The voltage regulator shall maintain the voltage within the limits
specified.
D. The alternator insulation system shall be NEMA Class H and shall be a combination
of epoxy coating and varnish. The alternator shall be sized and properly de-rated
according to NEMA MG1-22-1975 to yield a maximum temperature rise of 80
degrees centigrade by resistance above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees
centigrade at rated altitude and load.
E. Excitation shall be provided by a direct connected brushless permanent magnetic

rotating exciter. The armature shall be of the three-phase design and connected to a
full wave three phase rotating bridge. Diodes used shall be of the silicon type
mounted on proper heat sinks with surge protector.
F. Exciter field power shall be provided by a separate permanent magnet generator

directly connected to the brushless exciter. The PMG shall provide sufficient power
to the excitation system to produce 400% current for 10 seconds from the main
operator armature during a three-phase fault with sufficient duration for protective
devices to operate.
2.10 ENGINE-GENERATOR CONTROL:
The engine-generator control box to be mounted on the generator end of each set shall
include the following components and devices:
A. Digital LCD Indicator for over-crank lockout, low oil pressure pre-alarm and
shutdown, over-speed shutdown, and high coolant temperature pre-alarm and
shutdown. Emergency Stop and Fault Alarm/Shutdown for the above and
acknowledge switch to silence alarm shall be mounted on paralleling switchboard.
Provide at least ten spare inputs (programmable)for end user use
B. Battery charger ammeter and voltmeter.
C. Contacts for remote indication of pre-alarms and engine shutdown at the paralleling
switchboard.
D. Engine control selector switch (remote / off / run)
E. Relay to start engine upon receiving signal of utility service failure from any transfer
switch.
F. All devices indicated for use with paralleling switchgear or automatic transfer switch
shall be wired to terminal blocks.
G. Provide the following protective devices for the following:
 Low coolant level

 OV/UV Relays
 Reverse Power Relay

H. Provide the following Miscellaneous Controls:
 Electronic Governor Control

 Alarm Modules including Sirens
 Panel Lights as extension of Item A
 Computer Communication Data Link (RS 485 Port) – to be connected to the
Contractor’s supplied (GENSET Supplier) Desktop Workstation (with software for
the monitoring/control of GENSET Electrical and Mechanical parameters). The
workstation shall be BMS ready and at least Pentium 4 complete with
accessories, printers, cd writers and UPS. Workstation shall be branded.
2.11 AUTOMATIC STARTING CIRCUIT
Automatic starting circuit shall be provided to start and stop the generators upon signal from
the automatic transfer switch or plant exerciser. Also, the total load of the system shall
dictate starting & stopping of the generators. i.e. generators shall be automatically
disconnected from the bus and then stop if necessary based on predetermined sequence as
load falls and be automatically restarted or restored to the bus as the load increases. The
circuit shall consist of, but not limited to the following:
A. Time delay on engine starting (0.2 to 180 sec.), factory set for 3 seconds.
B. Time delay for engine cool-off (30 sec. to 30 min.), factory set for 10 minutes unless
the engine supplier recommends a longer period.
C. Engine starting contact (5 cranks of 20 sec. per crank).
D. Plant exerciser (15 min. per 168 hrs.)
E. Test switches to simulate normal power failure.
F. Pilot lights for indicating normal and emergency position, selector switches and all
necessary accessories for a fully operational automatic system.
2.12 ENGINE GENERATOR SET PERFORMANCE
A. The engine generator set shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria:
1. Voltage regulation: + 0.5 percent from 0 to 100% load.
2. Steady state voltage stability: + 0.25 percent rated voltage.
3. Balanced telephone interference factor (TIF) shall not exceed 50.
4. Frequency regulation from no load to full load: ± 1.00 percent.
5. Steady state frequency stability shall be ± 0.25 percent.
6. Generator set shall be capable of start-up and accepting rated load within 10
seconds.
7. Maximum frequency change on application or removal of 100% rated load

resistive and reactive load shall not exceed ± 5.0 percent.
8. Maximum recovery time to return to frequency stability bandwidth shall not

exceed 4 seconds.
9. Maximum voltage dip with one step application of load up to 100% rated
capacity at 0.8 power factor shall not exceed 10 percent.
10. Maximum voltage rise with one step removal of 100% load at 0.8 power
factor shall no exceed 12%.
11. Voltage recovery time with one step application or removal of load up to
100% rated capacity at 0.8 power factor shall not exceed 1 second.
2.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Installation shall be in accordance with approved vibration isolation and seismic

restraint submittal.
B. The vibration isolator for the Genset shall be spring type, with 150mm maximum
deflections, UBC Zone 4 Seismic Rated.
C. Pipe hangers shall be isolated from the soffit with 75mm deflection springs for 15
meters (minimum).
D. Fuel oil and coolant lines shall be flexible braided bronze hoses.
E. Raceway connections to unit shall be in liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
2.14 SYSTEM OPERATION
Three (2) units of 600KW, 230V, 3Ø, 4-wire, 60HZ. Stand-by Duty Generator Sets to supply
electric power for at least 24 hours of continuous operation in the absence of utility power.
The one (1) unit shall be operating simultaneously thru a common bus of the Generator
Paralleling Switchgear whenever required then one (1) unit shall be on stand by duty.
The Generator Control Panel shall be equipped with Load Shedding Devices (at least four
stages). The Generator Set Supplier/Contractor shall be responsible for the required wiring
connection going to the Main Distribution Panel including coordination with the MDP Supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Position each generator to allow adequate ventilation over engine block and through
the radiator and to prevent short-circuiting of radiator discharge air back to engine
and radiator intake.
B. Post/display within the Gen-set Room Schematic and Wiring Diagram of the whole
Emergency Power System (Frame with glass cover). Include also the securing and
posting of “Permit to Operate”, also in frame with glass cover.
3.2 T ESTS & INSPECTION
A. The gen-set supplier shall also include the following service after installation:
1. Check out gen-set installation.

2. Startup gen-set.
3. Check out operating functions of gen-set.
4. Instruct and train Owner’s personnel at the site in the proper operating and
routine maintenance of the gen-set.
5. The Contractor/Supplier will be responsible on start-up for proper operation

of the gen-set to the output circuit breaker.
6. Commercial test data on the generator or alternator and exciter shall be

supplied to the Owner at the time of tests on the gen-set. This shall include
the manufacturer’s standard generator efficiency curve.
7. The Owner or his agent shall have the right to make such test and
inspections of the prime duty generator sets or parts thereof, at any time
during the manufacture period and as he may desire with the plant
production. The Owner’s inspector shall have the right to reject any unit or
parts thereof, which fail to meet the requirements of these specifications.
8. Manufacturer shall provide proof of torsional analysis. It shall be certified

that
a mathematical torsional analysis has been made of a like combination of
engine and alternator. The certification shall be based on an actual
torsiograph test.
9. Manufacturer shall provide Owner with sample “Log and Preventive

Maintenance Schedule” for the equipment.
10. Manufacturer shall supply a 120% rated temporary load bank for each
engine and use same to test total engine set for final acceptance. Unit may
be air or water-cooled. Actual electrical loads shall not be used for testing.
3.3 STARTUP T EST
A. The services of startup personnel are to be furnished by the generator set

manufacturer or his local representative.
B. Upon completion of startup and calibration and adjustment of all controls, the
supplier shall assist The Electrical Contractor in startup test with all designated loads
connected to generator, and with all supporting mechanical equipment (fans, etc., for
generator room cooling) in operation.
C. Upon completion of the startup test and correction of any fault therein found, the
supplier shall notify the Owner’s Representative of preparedness for acceptance test.
D. Log of voltage at generator and total current on each phase shall be prepared during
load test and submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review as detailed
hereinafter.
E. If equipment does not meet test requirements for reason of mis-installation, the
supplier will be responsible for correcting errors and rerunning tests. Faulty operation
of equipment shall be corrected at the expense and responsibility of the
manufacturer/supplier .
F. Engine-Generator Test – Field test shall include operating the new engine generating
set for 2 hours at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% resistive load. The supplier shall furnish all

lubricants; and shall furnish all instruments necessary to conduct the test. Connect
all instruments required to determine the engine fuel consumption and output of the
generator. The building mechanical and lighting load shall be used for this generator
test.
G. Equipment and Accessories Test – shall be performed as a part of the startup test.
Supplier shall indicate completion of each item on separate lists (copy of this
document) prepared for generating each item and entering where applicable, log
data for the test item. Completed test report shall be forwarded to the Owner’s
Representative for review at least 2 weeks prior to the subsequent Acceptance Test.
Items to be included in the startup test shall include:
1. Fuel System – Piping joints, pump operation, gauge operation, day tank float
adjustment and controls.
2. Battery System – Charge, electrolyte, cable connections, charger operation.
3. Log of fuel consumed during test and verification of proper fuel consumption.
4. Generator – Voltage and KW loading with all assigned loads connected to

system and record of surge handling capability when single greatest
magnitude load is added to the system when loaded to no less than 50% of
system capability.
5. Startup Time – Total seconds elapsed from initiation of generator start to

transfer of automatic transfer switch.
6. Mounting – Vibration isolator adjustment and proper installation.
7. Cooling System – Proper fill of specified coolant.
8. Lubricants – Proper fill of lubricants recommended by manufacturer.
9. Engine Gauge Readings at Maximum Load – Water, lube oil, fuel oil.
10. Derangement Signals – Simulate derangement and check for proper

operation of alarms.
11. Calibration and Testing of meters, current transformers, relays, etc.
12. Starting Control System - Check of engine start from the automatic transfer
switch equipped with engine starting contacts and manual start system.
13. AC supply to battery charger.
14. Time delay on engine transfer after restoration of electric service to normal
source.
15. Exhaust System - Integrity of joints and freedom from obstructions. Exhaust
pipe shall be sized so as to limit the back pressure to allowable level.
16. Control Panel - Proper operation of all automatic and manual control
devices.
3.4 POWER SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE T EST
A. Final test shall be conducted at the site after installation has been completed in the

presence of the Owner’s Representative, Consultant and the Equipment

Manufacturer’s Representatives (not supplier’s representative). Before tests are run,
the Owner’s representative shall be notified 2 weeks in advance so that
manufacturer’s representatives are present. If equipment do not meet for reason of
mis-installation, the supplier will be responsible for correcting errors and rerunning
tests. Manufacturer shall correct faulty operation of the equipment.
B. Engine – Generator Test: Field test shall include operating engine generating set for
2 hours at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% load. The supplier shall furnish all instruments
required to determine the engine fuel consumption and the output of the generator.
The gen-set supplier shall supply a 120% rated temporary load bank for each engine
and use same to test total engine set for final acceptance test. Unit may be air or
water-cooled. Building loads shall not be used for test.
C. Electrical Test
1. Tests shall be performed by application of 70% normal voltage or less.

Generator shall start and automatic transfer switch shall operate.
2. Check phase rotation on all motors while operation on normal and / or

generator power.
3.5 T URNOVER DOCUMENTS/CLOSE -OUT
A. Operating Instruction, Installation and Maintenance Manuals
1. Provide Operating, Instruction, Installation and Maintenance Manuals for

equipment and materials furnished under this Division.
2. Submit five copies of Operating, Instruction, Installation and Maintenance

Manuals for review at least one week before the completion date. Assemble
data in a completely indexed volume or volumes in three –ring binders and
identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. Print the
project name on the outside of the binders.
3. Maintenance manuals shall include complete cleaning and servicing data

compiled in a clear and easily understandable format. Show model numbers
of each piece of equipment, complete list of replacement parts, capacity
ratings, and actual loads.
4. Provide the following where applicable:
a. Identifying name and mark number.

b. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list)
c. Complete nameplate data.
d. Certified Record Drawings and Final Reviewed submittals.
e. Parts list.
f. Performance curves and data.
g. Wiring diagrams
h. Manufacturer’ recommended operating and maintenance instructions
with all non- applicable information deleted.
i. List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements.
j. Assembly and disassembly instructions for normal service
requirements.
k. Test reports.
l. Trouble shooting diagnostics instructions where applicable.

m. Address of service organization including phone and fax numbers.
3.6 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain on a daily basis at the project site a complete set of Record Drawings,
reflecting an accurate dimensional record of deviations between work shown on
Drawings and that actually installed.
B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed; suitably
identify locations of all equipment by at least two dimensions to permanent
structures. In addition, mark the Record Drawings to show the precise location of
concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded raceways and
cables and all changes and deviations in the Electrical work form that shown on the
Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization to
make changes in the layout or work.
C. Upon completion of the installation obtain from the Consultants a complete set of
diskettes of Architectural/Engineering drawings. In a neat and accurate manner,
provide a complete record of all revisions of the original changes as actually
installed. The cost of transparencies and for making required changes shall be
included in the contract. Submit one set of black line prints of those revised
transparencies for review. After review, make necessary changes to review for
accuracy or completeness.
D. All record drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Electrical Engineer.
Those record drawings shall also be signed and sealed by the authority having
jurisdiction or the Local Government Unit concerned.
E. All record drawings should be in CAD (at least Release 2008). Both prints (5 sets)
and a compact disk (CD) file of those record drawings should be submitted to the
Owner after approval.
3.7 FINAL PUNCH LIST
A. Prior to the Final Punch List, certify that systems and equipment are complete,
operational, and are in compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. During the final Punch List, provide personnel with access keys, hand held radios,
and necessary expertise to operate each system and piece of equipment to
demonstrate operational compliance with the Contract Documents.
C. Any deficiencies noted on the Final Punch List shall be expeditiously corrected and
certified in writing.
3.8 SCHEDULE OF T ECHNICAL DATA
Description Specified
ITEM
A Engine Generator
1. Equipment Reference No. G-1 ,G-2
2. No. of Units 2
3. Electrical/Mechanical Parameters
 KVA 750
 KW 600
 Power Factor 80%
 RPM 1800

 Connection Wye
 Duty Prime
 Fuel Diesel
 Frequency (Hz) 60
B Generator Control Panel

1. Construction Mounted at Genset
2. Operation Automatic / Manual
C Electric Starting System
1. Electric Starting Motor
 Brand As per manufacturer recommended
OEM
 Technical Specification As per manufacturer requirement
2. Battery
 Brand As per manufacturer recommended
OEM
 Technical Specification As per manufacturer requirement
D Engine Cooling System
1. Radiator As per manufacturer recommended
2. Blower OEM. Refer to Section 16200:
3. Circulating Pump Clause 2.4 of the technical
4. H2O Filter specification.
E Air Intake and Exhaust System
1. Air Cleaner As per manufacturer recommended
2. Exhaust Silencer OEM. Refer to Section 16200
Technical Specifications.
Note :
Refer to Technical Specifications for detailed requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Electricity Metering SECTION 16211
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................................................................................... 2
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .......................................................................................................... 2
1.8 COORDINATION .................................................................................................................... 2
1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT .......................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING ............................................................................... 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 4
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 4
3.4 DEMONSTRATION ................................................................................................................. 4

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16211-Electricity
Metering.doc
SECTION 16211
ELECTRICITY METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Division 16 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in

Sections 17100, 17106, 117107, 17109, 17110 and other sections referenced in 17100.
These include, but are not limited to, commissioning, enhanced commissioning, preparation
of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of the Employer’s personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by Owner.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. KY Pulse: Term used by the metering industry to describe a method of measuring

consumption of electricity that is based on a relay opening and closing in response to the
rotation of the disk in the meter.
B. PC: Personal computer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring
designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-
installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Application and operating software documentation.

2. Software licenses.
3. Software service agreement.
4. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, design user's guides for
software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy Submittal.

Metering.doc
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Receive, store, and handle modular meter center according to NECA 400.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE or others unless permitted under the
following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service
according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE no fewer than seven days in advance of

proposed interruption of electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE written permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and components they
furnish as follows:
1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power services.

2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for
electricity-metering components.
1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial
Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new
or revised licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE to allow scheduling

and access to system and to allow EMPLOYER’S REPRESENATIVE to upgrade his
computer equipment if necessary.

Metering.doc
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING
B. General Requirements for EMPLOYER’S Meters:
1. Comply with UL 1244.

2. Meters used for billing shall have at least an accuracy of at least 0.5 percent of
reading, complying with requirements in ANSI C12.20.
3. Meters shall comply, be tested and certified by Energy Regulatory Commission.
4. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 minimum, with hasp for padlocking or sealing.
5. Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 16075 "Electrical
Identification."
6. Memory Backup: Self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72
hours, minimum.
7. Sensors: Current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum
range and accuracy for meters indicated for this application.
a. Type: Split and solid core as identified on plan.
8. Current-Transformer Cabinet: Listed or recommended by metering equipment

manufacturer for use with sensors indicated.
9. Building Management System (BMS) Interface: One digital KY pulse to a user-
definable increment of energy measurement. Match signal to BMS input and arrange
to convey the instantaneous, integrated, demand level measured by meter to provide
data for processing and possible programmed demand control action by destination
system.
C. Kilowatt-hour/Demand Meter: Electronic single-and three-phase meters, measuring

electricity use and demand. Demand shall be integrated over a 15-minute interval.
1. Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with
voltage rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.
2. Display: LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch (6 mm) high, indicating
accumulative kilowatt-hours, current time and date, current demand, and historic
peak demand and time and date of historic peak demand. Retain accumulated
kilowatt-hour and historic peak demand in a nonvolatile memory, until reset.
D. Data Transmission Cable: Transmit KY pulse data over Class 1 control-circuit conductors in
raceway. Comply with Division 16 Section 16123 "Control Communication Cables"
E. Software: PC based, a product of meter manufacturer, suitable for calculation of utility cost
allocation and billing.
1. Tenant or Activity Billing Software: Automatically import energy-usage records to

automatically compute and prepare tenant bills, activity demand and energy-use
statements based on metering of energy use and peak demand. Maintain separate
directory for each tenant's historical billing information. Prepare summary reports in
user-defined formats and time intervals.

Metering.doc
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.
B. Install meters furnished by utility company. Install raceways and equipment according to
utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and
extend grounding connections as required by utility company.
C. Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation requirements.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical

Identification."
1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required by

NFPA 70.
2. Equipment Identification Labels: Adhesive film labels with clear protective overlay.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by

metered feeder.
2. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition.
3. Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a
measurable meter indication. Use test-load placement and setting that ensures
continuous, safe operation.
4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual
electricity used, based on test-load rating, duration of test, and sample
measurements of supply voltage at test-load connection. Record test results.
C. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owners’ maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain the electrical metering.
END OF SECTION

Metering.doc
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Dry Type (Cast Resin) Power Transformers SECTION 16330
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STANDARDS............................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 FACTORY TESTING ................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................ 2
2.2 RATINGS ................................................................................................................................ 2
2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS............................................................................................................ 2
2.4 CORE AND COIL ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................................... 2
2.5 HIGH VOLTAGE TAPS................................................................................................................ 3
2.6 ENCLOSURE ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.7 FORCED AIR COOLING ............................................................................................................. 3
2.8 ACCESSORIES......................................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 3
3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 3
3.2. VISUAL AND MEDICAL INSPECTION ............................................................................................. 4
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC

CD\P06\Electrical\16330-Dry Type (Cast Resin) Power Transformers.doc
SECTION 16330
DRY TYPE (CAST RESIN) POWER TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide dry type power transformers in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. PS
B. PEC (Latest Edition)
C. ANSI
D. IEC
E. IEEE
F. NEMA
G. UL
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's product data sheets, electrical ratings, heat release data, physical
dimensions, noise ratings, and weights.
B. Factory test reports.
C. Certified vibration isolation and seismic restraint details and product data showing
the number and location of each support and restraint and the exact number, size,
and type of each anchor.
D. Field test reports.
1.4 FACTORY T ESTING
A. No load losses.
B. Excitation current.
C. Resistance measurement.
D. Ratio test.
E. Polarity and phase relations test.
F. Impedance and load loss.
G. Applied potential test.
H. Induced potential test.
I. Partial discharge.
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC Page 1 of 4

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.2 RATINGS
A. Dry type cast resin power transformers shall be two winding type, three phase, 60
hertz, with ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Self cooled (AA) KVA ratings shall
o o
be suitable for 30 C average, 40 C maximum ambient temperature.
B. Dry type transformers shall be rated as follows:
1. Primary voltage: 13,200V, 3 phase, delta.

2. Secondary voltage: 400/230V, 3 phase, 4 wire, wye. (For TMC
confirmation)
3. Basic Impulse Level (BIL): 200 KV.
4. Impedence: 6%
C. High voltage taps shall be full capacity with 2 - 2 1/2% above and below rated
primary voltage.
D. Temperature rise shall not exceed 150oC at rated KVA.
E. Sound levels: ANSI standard.
F. The transformers impendence shall not exceed 6% and shall not be lower than 5.5%.
G. The transformer shall designed and constructed for low no-load (iron) and load
(copper) losses. Guaranteed values of the losses shall be entered in the
manufacturer’s data sheet.
2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Insulation materials for the primary and secondary coil assembly shall be rated for
continuous 155o C Temperature (Class F).
2.4 CORE AND COIL ASSEMBLY
A. The core shall be cruciform shape constructed of non aging, cold rolled, grain
oriented, high permeability silicon steel.
B. Core laminations shall be free of burrs, stacked without gaps. The core framing
structure shall be of rigid construction to provide full clamping pressure upon the core
and provide the support points for the coils.
C. The primary and secondary coils shall be continuously wound. Coils shall be
adequately braced for full short circuit capability.
D. The entire primary winding shall be solidly cast in epoxy resin using a vacuum
process to insure the absence of voids. Each primary winding shall be tested after
casting to verify the absence of voids. The secondary windings shall be the same
construction as the primary windings, or constructed of sheet wound conductor with
epoxy impregnated insulation between the layers which, when baked, forms the coil
into a solid epoxy casting.

E. Vibration dampening pads shall be provided to isolate core/coil assembly from the
base structure.
2.5 HIGH VOLTAGE TAPS
A. Tap leads shall be terminated at the coils and equipped with provisions for changing
taps under de-energized conditions.
2.6 ENCLOSURE
A. The enclosure shall be NEMA 1 indoor type constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel
equipped with removable panels for access to the core and coils on the front and rear
sides. Ventilated openings shall be furnished to meet NEMA standards. The
enclosure shall include provisions for rolling, skidding, lifting and jacking for
installation. Enclosure finish shall be in the manufacturer’s standard grey paint.
2.7 FORCED AIR COOLING
A. A complete forced air cooling system (AA/FA) shall be provided for automatically
increasing the self cooled rating by 40%. The forced air cooling system shall be a
solid state device with continuous temperature monitoring. Features shall include
test switches, digital temperature indication for each phase or highest temperature,
manual or automatic fan control switches, audible alarm silencing switch, memory,
and self test.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. All NEMA standard accessories shall be provided including primary and secondary
bus terminations, removable panels, provisions for grounding, instruction nameplate,
rating plate, diagram plate, warning plate, temperature monitoring equipment, skids
with detachable rollers, jacking provision, lifting eyes, etc.
3.1 GENERAL
A. Transformers shall be floor mounted on 15 cm high concrete housekeeping pads.

Provide neoprene pads between transformer legs and housekeeping pad and anchor
transformers to floor.
B. Provide grounding electrode conductor from transformer secondary neutral to

nearest concrete embedded steel reinforcing bar and cold water pipe.
C. Conduit connected to transformers shall be flexible metal conduit, 60 cm minimum

length, 150 cm maximum length.
D. Provide seismic restraints.
3.2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The following standard field tests shall be performed on the equipment prior to
energizing transformer.
1. Turns ratio tests at the rated voltage connection and at all tap connections.
2. Polarity and phase relation tests on the rated voltage connection.
3. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger transformer windings high to low and
ground, low to high and ground, and high & low to ground.

B. Check for damage and tight connection prior to energizing transformer.
C. Adjust primary taps so secondary voltage is within zero to 2 percent of rated voltage
at no load.
3.2. VISUAL AND MEDICAL INSPECTION
A. Check primary, secondary and ground connections.
B. Clean and inspect bushings.
C. Inspect bushing clamp and bushings.
D. Check accessory devices for condition and proper operation.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches SECTION 16410
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY............................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .......................................................................................................... 2
1.7 COORDINATION .................................................................................................................... 2
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES ..................................................................................................... 3
2.2 ENCLOSURES ....................................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.3 IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 4
3.4 FILED QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 4
3.5 ADJUSTING .......................................................................................................................... 5

S:\admin\mpi\MP1626_Philippine General Hospital Various Projects\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2017-07-12_100% CD\P06\Electrical\16410-Enclosed
Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches.doc
SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Disconnect Switches
2. Individually mounted, enclosed circuit breakers.
3. Molded-case switches.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Current and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
E. Manufacturer's field service report.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 1 Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and
circuit breakers.
2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source
from single manufacturer.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not
exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and
required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer
than three of each size and type.
2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES
B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit
withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.
C. Features and Accessories:
1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type
with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay
settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase,
zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.
4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
6. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
7. Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when switch has tripped.
8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be
removable only when switch is in off position.
9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered 240-V ac.
2.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,
to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
3. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 9.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section 16074
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.
E. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.4 FILED QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60
days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch
and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial
Completion.
c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed
switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16 Section 16055

"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination".
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Motor Control Centers SECTION 16443
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 STANDARDS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 FIELD TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.6 IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. ............................................................................................. 2
2.2 RATINGS ............................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 2
2.4 BUS SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 2
2.5 MOTOR CONTROLLERS ........................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 4
3.2 COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................... 4
3.3 DEMONSTRATION ................................................................................................................... 4

CD\P06\Electrical\16443-Motor Control Centers.doc
SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide motor control centers in accordance with the Contract Documents.
A. Motor control centers shall be the same manufacturer as the switchboards.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. IEC 439-1.
B. NEMA ICS 2-321 and 1C52-322.
C. UL 547, 845, and 1004.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers product data sheets for overcurrent protection devices.
B. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing motor control centers,

housekeeping pads and support locations and types.
C. Single line diagram showing bus, cable lugs, motor controller type, rating, overcurrent
protection, identification nameplate and fuse clip sizes.
D. Control diagrams, motor controller wiring diagrams, overload heater ratings and field
connection diagrams.
E. Installation instructions.
F. Field test reports.
G. Statement verifying coordination with the automatic temperature controls and the fire
alarm system.
H. Seismic restraint calculations.
1.5 FIELD T ESTING
A. Test each motor controller and verify proper operation.
B. Test motors under load and verify proper rotation.
1.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide an identification nameplate for each motor control center, each starter and each
overcurrent protection device.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: SEE SECTION 16007 “ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND

SUPPLIERS”.
2.2 RATINGS
A. Motor control centers shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on the Drawings.
B. Motor control centers and devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating of 65,000
RMS symmetrical amperes (400V) or greater where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 50 cm wide by 50 cm deep per section.
D. Wiring shall be NEMA Class I, Type B.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Structures shall be totally enclosed, dead front, free standing assemblies, NEMA 2, not
less than US gauge 12 (2.657mm). Provide removable lifting angles.
B. Provide a horizontal wireway at the top, isolated from the horizontal bus and readily
accessible. Provide a horizontal wireway at the bottom. Provide an isolated vertical
wireway with cable supports in each, accessible through hinged doors.
C. Provide an individual front door for each unit compartment, mechanically interlocked
(defeatable) with the unit disconnect switch to prevent unintentional opening of the door
or application of power while the door is open. Provide an interlock (defeatable) to
prevent removal or insertion of a unit when the disconnect is in the ON position. Provide
disconnect handle mounted on door of each unit compartment with clearly marked ON
and OFF designations. Handle shall be designed for padlocking in OFF position up to 3
padlocks.
D. Space for future devices shall include all necessary bus, supports and connections.
E. Motor controllers shall be draw out type with a positive guide rail system and stab
shrouds to ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Power wiring to stabs shall be
contained within the draw out unit.
2.4 BUS SYSTEM
A. Bus bars shall be 98% conductivity silver plated copper sized at not more than 1000
amperes per square inch. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating shown on the
Drawings. Where provided, neutral bus shall be full size. Provide a 33% minimum
ground bus, extending along the full length of the motor control center.
B. Horizontal bus shall be full size (600A minimum), tapered bus is not permitted. Provide
bolt holes drilled and tapped for future extension at the end of bus bars including neutral
and ground bus so that the addition of a future section would require only the installation
of standard bolted splice plates.

2.5 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Provide full voltage, non reversing (FVNR) type combination magnetic starters for
motors of ½ HP to 7.5HP.
B. Provide reduced voltage, non reversing, Wye-delta type combination magnetic starters
for motors 10HP up to 50HP.
1. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing.

2. Closed transition from reduced to full voltage.
C. Provide reduced voltage, non reversing, auto-transformer type, combination starters for
motors above 50HP.
1. Two winding, open delta connected.

2. Adjustable timing relay for start to run transfer timing.
D. Fusible switch type disconnect with clips for UL Class R type fuses. Where overcurrent
protection without a motor controller is required, provide fusible switch type disconnect
with clips for UL Class R type fuses.
E. Provide an individual control power transformer with two primary and one secondary
control fuses for each motor controller. The other secondary lead shall be grounded.
Secondary voltage shall be 230V AC.
F. Provide each motor controller with three phase, ambient temperature compensating,
thermal overload relays with heaters. Overload relays shall have be adjustable from
90% to 110% of heater rating, factory set at 100%. Provide an insulated pushbutton on
the outside of door to reset overload relays.
G. Provide each motor controller with a Hand-Off-Automatic (HOA) selector switch. Provide
an Hand-Automatic (HA) selector switch for life safety equipment. Mount switch on
outside of door.
H. Provide each motor controller with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary
contacts, green OFF and red RUNNING long life (50,000 hours) pilot indicators on
outside of door, auxiliary relays and other devices required for operation of the
equipment to be controlled.

3.1 GENERAL
A. Install motor control centers when the area is free of dust and debris. Protect from dust
and moisture.
B. Install motor control centers on 10 cm high concrete housekeeping pads which follow the
contour of the motor control center with 25 mm of overlap on all sides
C. Provide channel sills below each motor control center where the motor control center
frame is not suitable for use as a floor sill.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Refer to Section 17100 “Commissioning” for commissioning requirements.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train EMPLOYER’S

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the engine generator.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Panel boards SECTION 16470
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 STANDARDS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 RATINGS ............................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................................................... 3
2.4 OVER CURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES .................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................ 4
3.2 TOUCH UP AND CLEANING ...................................................................................................... 4
3.4 T & C DETAILS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE MANUFACTURER ........................................................ 4
MEINHARDT PHILIPPPINES INC.

SECTION 16470
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide panel boards in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Panel boards shall include both branch panel boards and distribution panels.
A. Panel boards shall be of the same manufacturer as the switch boards.
B. Provide sizes of over current and ground fault protection devices where required by
results of short circuit study.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. Panel boards
1. PS
2. PEC (Part 1) – Latest Edition.
3. IEC
4. NEMA PB-1
5. UL 50 and 67
B. Circuit Breakers:
1. PS
2. PEC (PART 1) – Latest Edition.
3. IEC
4. NEMA AB-1
5. UL 489
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Manufacturers’ product data sheets, electrical ratings, coordination of tripping

curves between main & branch circuit breakers and installation instructions.
2. Detailed technical information for all the components including circuit
breakers, protective relays, current transformers, measuring instruments,
surge protection devices, etc.
3. Support locations and types.
MEINHARDT PHILIPPPINES INC. Page 1 of 4

CD\P06\Electrical\16470-Panel boards.doc
B. Branch Panel boards:
1. Detailed description and layout of each Panel board, showing physical

dimensions, circuit breaker ratings and layout, identification nameplate and
cable lugs.
C. Distribution Panels:
1. Dimensioned layout and elevation drawings showing physical over current

protection and housekeeping pads.
2. Detailed description of each distribution panel, showing over current

protection device ratings and layout, identification nameplate, cable lugs and
fuse clip sizes.
D. Gauge of sheet metal for fabrication of panel.
E. Seismic restraint calculations.
F. Manufacturer Certification of Bus-bar Current Density.
G. Single line diagram of each and every panel.
1.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide an identification nameplate for each panel board, each main and each feeder
over current protection device. The nameplate should include voltage and source of
power for each panel.
B. Provide a typewritten directory card indicating load served by type and location for
each branch circuit in each branch panel board. Mount directory in frame on inside of
branch panel board door.
C. Panel board series connected ratings shall be displayed and current ratings of over
current protection devices shall be displayed on the device.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.2 RATINGS
A. Panel boards shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on Drawings.
B. Panel boards and over current protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit
rating as specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings.
C. Branch Panel boards:
1. Branch Panel boards are identified with the prefix LP as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 50cm wide by 15 cm deep.

3. Branch Panel boards (LP): 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum
interrupting capacity, unless noted otherwise.

D. Distribution Panels:
1. Distribution panels are identified with the prefix DP as shown on the

Drawings.
2. Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 50 cm wide by 20 cm deep.
3. Distribution panel (DP): 25,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum

interrupting capacity, unless noted otherwise.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Enclosures shall be corrosion resistant galvanized (zinc finished) sheet steel. Fronts
shall be cold rolled steel, finish coated with ANSI 61 grey enamel over a rust inhibitor.
Panel locks shall be keyed alike. Recessed flush mounted panels shall have
overlapping front.
B. Panel boards to be installed indoor should be NEMA 2 (IP-31) while outdoor type
Panel boards shall be NEMA 3R (IP-65).
C. Doors for branch Panel boards shall be one piece bolt on front with a lockable hinged
door over the over current protection devices.
D. Space for future devices shall include all necessary bus, supports and connections.
2.4 OVER CURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Over current protection types:
1. Branch Panel boards (LP): Molded case circuit breakers.
2. Distribution panels (DP): Molded case circuit breakers.
B. Molded case circuit breakers:
1. Completely sealed enclosure. Bolt-on type Toggle type operating handle. Trip
ampere rating and ON/OFF indication clearly visible.
2. Thermal-magnetic trip-free, trip-indicating, quick-make, quick-break with

inverse time characteristic. Single-handle and common tripping on multiple
breakers. External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position.
3. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc-quenching devices.
4. Breakers for lighting circuits shall be SWD rated.
5. Provide main breakers in Panel boards served from transformers unless

separate transformer secondary protection is provided.
6. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 220V AC coils.
C. Ground Fault Interrupters
Ground fault interrupter branch circuit breakers shall be provided for individual
outgoing final circuits to all receptacle outlets or as indicated on the Drawings. Circuit
breakers shall be circuit interrupting which will operate manually for normal switching
functions and automatically under overload, short circuit and 0.005 amp line-to-
ground fault conditions. The operating mechanism shall be entirely trip-free so that

contact cannot be held close against an abnormal overcurrent, short circuit or ground
fault condition. The device shall be bolt-on type with insulated case construction and
shall be interchangeable with standard single pole breakers utilized in the Panel
board.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount panels 1.8 meters above finished floor to top unless otherwise noted.
B. Connect feed-through panels to main feeder by insulated parallel gutter taps.
C. Where Panel boards are mounted recessed flush in wall, maintain fire integrity of
wall. Provide one empty 20 mm IMC conduit stubbed up into nearest accessible
ceiling location for every three spare or space positions.
D. Neatly arrange wiring and tie together in each gutter with nylon tie wraps at minimum
10 cm intervals.
E. Provide plugs on open knockouts.
F. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in Panel boards.
G. Provide cabinet lock with key. All Panel boards shall be keyed alike.
3.2 T OUCH UP AND CLEANING
A. Back boxes shall be clean, dry and free of construction debris and fireproofing
overspray prior to installation of Panel board interior.
B. Vacuum back boxes clean of debris after installation and wiring of branch circuits.
C. Repair and touch up paint damaged surfaces.
A. Measure steady state load current at each Panel board feeder. Should the difference
at any Panel board between phases exceed 10 percent, rearrange circuits in the
Panel board to balance the phase loads within 10 percent. However, proper phasing
for multi-wire branch circuits should be maintained.
B. Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. Check
proper installation and tightness of connection for circuit breakers, fusible switches
and fuses.
3.4 T & C DETAILS T O BE PROVIDED BY T HE MANUFACTURER
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Luminaires and Accessories SECTION 16500
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................................. 1
1.3 STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS...................................................................................................................... 1
2.2 LAMPS ................................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 BALLASTS............................................................................................................................... 2
2.4 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION .................................................................................................. 3
2.5 FINISHES ................................................................................................................................ 3
2.6 REFLECTORS .......................................................................................................................... 3
2.7 LENSES, FACEPLATES AND TRIMS ............................................................................................. 4
2.8 LUMINAIRE W IRING .................................................................................................................. 4
2.9 LAMPHOLDERS ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.10 ACCESSORIES......................................................................................................................... 5
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................. 6

CD\P06\Electrical\16500-Luminaires and Accessories.doc
SECTION 16500
LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide luminaires and accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.
A. Lamps shall be of the same manufacturer.
B. Ballasts shall be of the same manufacturer.
C. Equipment shall meet local energy ordinances.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. General: PS, PEC (PART I and PART II) – Latest Edition.
B. Ballasts: ANSI C82.2 and UL 935 and 1029.
C. Cords: UL 62.
D. Exit Signs and Emergency Luminaires: NFPA 70 and UL 101 and 924.
E. Hazardous Locations: UL 506, 844, 886, 1203, and 1225.
F. Lamp Holders and Starters: UL 496, 542, and 879.
G. Luminaires: UL 57, 676, 1570, 1571, and 1572.
H. Metal Halide and Mercury Vapor Lamps: Federal Standard 21 CFR 1040.30.
I. Photometric data: Independent testing laboratory certified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's product data sheets for each luminaire indicating luminaire type, ballasts
quantity and type, lamp quantity and type, photometric data, materials, finishes,
accessories, voltage, input watts, CFM data and photographic image of luminaire.
B. Manufacturer's data sheets for each ballasts including ballast type, power factor, input
voltage, input watts and ballast factor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Lighting Luminaires: Refer to Section 16007.
B. Ballasts:

1. Electronic type: Refer to Section 16007
C. Lamps: Refer to Section 16007.
2.2 LAMPS
A. Lamps shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the luminaries’ schedule on the
Drawings:
1. Long fluorescent: T-5, cool white, colour temperature 6500 k, energy savings
type.
2. Color temperature for Twin tube and double twin tube fluorescent shall be 3000K
or as required by ID/Architect.
3. Color temperature shall be for Compact fluorescent shall be 3000K or as required
by ID/Architect.
4. Incandescent: 240V, inside frosted.
5. Low Voltage tungsten halogen
B. Exit Lights
1. Self powered fully automatic units with rechargeable maintenance-free long life
and high temperature Nicad battery packs for 120 mins. back up operation, 2 w
LED lamp, 220-240 VAC. 60 Hz. Size of letter & colors as per NFPA
Requirement.
2.3 BALLASTS
A. General:
1. Ballasts shall be suitable for the electrical characteristics of the supply circuits to
which they are to be connected and which are suitable for operating the specified
lamps.
2. Luminaires controlled by dimmers shall be provided with dimming type ballasts.
3. Single lamp ballasts for long fluorescent lamps shall be kept to a minimum and
shall only be used for the last odd lamp in a room or space.
B. Fluorescent:
1. Provide electronic ballasts wherever there is an electronic ballast available for

any specified lamp or combination of lamps. Where electronic ballasts are not
available, provide electromagnetic ballasts as per the Project Manager’s
approval.
2. Electronic Ballasts:
a. High frequency electronic type (digital) operating lamps at a frequency of

20 KHZ or higher with no detectable lamp flicker.
b. Ballasts shall meet or exceed FCC Regulations Part 18 and NEMA
standards regarding electromagnetic and radio frequency interference
and shall not interfere with operation of other electrical equipment.
c. Ballasts shall meet or exceed ANSI C62.41, Category A and IEEE 587
standards regarding harmonic distortion and surge protection.
d. Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall yield normal lamp
life.
e. Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.6.
f. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10% and as required to meet
utility company requirements. Third harmonic (180 HZ) RMS current
must be less than 27 1/2% of the fundamental (60 HZ) current.
g. Three year warranty.

2.4 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Luminaires shall be completely factory assembled and wired, and equipped with
necessary lampholders, ballasts, wiring, shielding, reflectors, channels, lenses and other
parts necessary to complete the luminaire installation.
B. Luminaire hardware shall be concealed. Weld exposed metal at joints, fill with weld
material, grind smooth and make free from light leaks. Gasket incandescent luminaires
with overlapping trim. Weld ballast support studs, socket saddle studs, and reflector
support studs to luminaire body; self threading screws are not acceptable. Ventilate
ballast compartments and firmly secure ballast to conducting metal surface. Luminaires
shall be designed for bottom relamping, unless otherwise noted.
C. Construct luminaires with a minimum number of joints. Unexposed joints shall be welded,
screwed or bolted; soldered joints are not acceptable. Do not use self tapping methods or
rivets for fastening removable parts used to gain access to electrical components
requiring service or replacement, or for fastening electrical components or their supports.
D. Cast or extruded parts of luminaires shall be close grained and free from imperfections or
discolorations, rigid, true to pattern, of ample weight and thickness, and properly fitted,
filed, ground, and buffed to provide finished surfaces and joints free of imperfections.
E. Housings for fluorescent and HID luminaires shall be designed to make electrical
components easily accessible and replaceable, without removing the luminaire body from
its mounting.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Luminaire finishes shall provide a durable, wear resistant surface. Surfaces shall be
chemically cleaned and treated with corrosion inhibiting (phosphating) material to assure
positive paint adhesion. Exposed metal surfaces (brass, bronze, aluminum, etc.) and
finished castings (except chromium plated or stainless steel parts) shall have an even
coat of high grade methacrylate lacquer or transparent epoxy. Anodize exposed
aluminum surfaces in a 20 minute bath for corrosion resistance. Sheet steel luminaire
housings, and iron and steel parts which have not received phosphating treatment, or
which are to be utilized in exterior applications, shall be zinc or cadmium plated, or hot dip
zinc galvanized after completion of all forming, welding and drilling operations.
B. Screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening or latching hardware shall be cadmium plated.
C. Provide luminaires with a high temperature baked enamel coating of selected color and
finish, unless otherwise noted. White baked enamel finished surfaces shall have a
minimum reflectance of 86%, unless otherwise noted.
2.6 REFLECTORS
A. Aluminum Reflectors:
1. Reflectors and reflecting cones or baffles shall be fabricated from #12 aluminum
reflector sheet, minimum (15 gauge). Material shall be free of tooling marks,
spinning lines and marks or indentation caused by riveting or other assembly
techniques. No rivets, springs or other hardware shall be visible after installation.
2. Reflectors and baffles shall be polished, buffed and anodized (Alzak) with
finish color as selected by the Architect.
B. Painted Reflectors:

1. Painted reflectors shall be formed before application of primer and paint.

Reflectors and reflector bodies for luminaires with baked white enamel finish shall
meet the following requirements and tests:
a. After 100 hours of exposure to fade-o-meter, reflectance shall be not

less than 86% and finish shall show no visible color change.
b. After 100 hours of exposure to 100% humidity at 100F, (cook box test)
finish shall show no blistering or other degraded effects.
c. After 150 hours of exposure to salt spray (20% sodium chloride) shall
cause no breakdown of film.
2.7 LENSES, FACEPLATES AND T RIMS
A. Plastic lenses shall be of virgin methyl methacrylate, unless otherwise indicated.

Polystyrene lenses are not acceptable.
B. Lenses, louvers and other light diffusing components shall be contained in frames. Lenses
shall be removable but positively held within the frames so that hinging or other motion of
the frame will not cause the diffusing component to drop out.
C. Faceplates on incandescent recessed luminaires shall open for access to the interior of
the luminaire, serve as a ceiling trim and positively held to the luminaire body by
adjustable means that permit the faceplate to be drawn up to the ceiling as tight as
necessary to insure complete contact of faceplate with the finished ceiling.
D. Provide ceiling trims for rectangular recessed luminaires with mitered corners,
continuously welded and smoothed before shop finishing. Lapping of trim metal is not
acceptable.
2.8 LUMINAIRE WIRING
A. Provide wiring between fluorescent and HID lampholders and ballasts of same or heavier
gauge than the leads furnished with the ballasts and having same or higher insulating and
heat resisting characteristics. Internal wiring of luminaires shall contain a minimum
number of splices. Splices shall be made with suitable mechanical insulated steel spring
type connectors.
B. Wiring channels and wireways shall be free from projections and rough or sharp edges.
Provide bushings at points or edges over which conductors pass.
2.9 LAMPHOLDERS
A. Incandescent and HID lampholders shall be porcelain bases with copper screw shells.
B. Fluorescent lampholders shall be white, heat resistant plastic. Fluorescent lampholders

operating with an open circuit voltage in excess of 300 volts shall be of the safety type
which opens the supply circuit when the lamp is removed from the socket.
C. Rigidly and securely attach lampholders to the luminaire enclosure or husk.
D. Pull chains shall be insulated joint type.
E. Provide lampholders suitable for specified lamps and set to position the lamps in optically
correct spacing and relationship to lenses, reflectors, filters and baffles.
F. Where fluorescent lamps are installed in unenclosed luminaires, provide a minimum of

two lamp retaining clips per lamp.

G. Lampholders shall be BJB brand or approved equal.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Where utilized as raceways, luminaires shall be suitable for use as raceways. Provide
feed through splice boxes where necessary.
B. Provide installation and supporting hardware including stems, plates, plaster frames,
hangers and similar items for support of luminaires for the ceiling construction in which
they shall be installed. Provide plaster frames made of non ferrous metal or of steel that
has been suitably rustproofed after fabrication.
C. Air handling luminaires shall have hinged air control vanes within the side slots (bent
metal vanes are not acceptable) factory set at fully open. Provide heat removal slots at
luminaire ends.
D. Interior fluorescent and HID luminaires utilizing ballast sound rating of lower than A shall
be provided with acoustical mounting pads between luminaire housing and ballast to
minimize vibration and noise level.
E. Provide tempered glass lenses for metal halide luminaires.
F. Provide fastening devices of a positive locking type, which do not require special tools to
apply or remove them. Do not use tie wires in place of fastening devices.
G. Attach reflectors to housing by means of safety chains to prevent reflectors from falling.
No part of the chain shall be visible after installation.
H. Provide a ceiling canopy for each stem. Canopy finish shall match stem finish.
I. Luminaires installed in air plenums shall be enclosed and gasketed.
J. Provide factory installed integral emergency battery packs in luminaires shown on the
Drawings. Battery pack shall be sealed, maintenance free nickel cadmium battery
capable of operating one or two 1200 mm long fluorescent lamps for a minimum of 120
minutes, with integral charger, pilot light and test switch.
3.1 GENERAL
A. Luminaire locations as indicated on the Drawings are general and approximate. Verify
exact location of luminaires with Architect prior to installation. Verify adequacy of
clearance with other equipment such as ducts, pipes, conduit or structural elements. Bring
conflicts to Architect's attention before proceeding with work.
B. Verify ceiling construction and furnish appropriate luminaire mounting supports, hardware,
trim and accessories for each luminaire.
C. Luminaires shall be installed free of light leaks, warps, dents or other irregularities. Light
leaks are not acceptable.
D. Install reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses, diffusers, louvers and decorative elements
of luminaires after completion of wet work, plastering, painting and general clean up in the
area of the luminaires. Provide final focusing and adjusting of lighting equipment.
Focusing and adjusting shall be performed under the Architect's supervision after normal
working hours.

E. Visible hanging devices shall be finished to match the luminaire finish, unless otherwise
noted. Suspended fixtures shall hang level and aligned when installed in rows.
F. Provide fire rated enclosures around recessed luminaires that are installed in fire rated
ceilings.
G. Provide attachment devices, brackets, plaster rings, saddle hanger and tie bars made of
formed, rolled or cast metal shapes with the requisite rigidity and strength to maintain
continuous alignment and support of installed luminaires.
H. Luminaires mounted in suspended ceilings shall be attached to the main runners of the
º
ceiling system with appropriate mounting hardware. Provide independent 45 slack cables
from corners of luminaires to structure above.
I. Provide at least two supports for single fluorescent luminaires. Where luminaires are
continuously mounted in rows, provide supports at maximum intervals of 2400 mm or
closer if necessary to prevent visible deflection.
J. Equipment requiring access for service and maintenance shall be installed so that
components requiring access are readily accessible.
K. Immediately prior to occupancy, clean reflectors, reflector cones, aperture plates, lenses,
trim rings, faceplates, louvers, lamps and decorative elements.
L. Replace burnt out lamps and noisy or defective ballasts.
M. Luminaires with emergency battery packs connected to unswitched circuits shall be

permanently on and shall go into the emergency mode upon loss of power to the
emergency battery pack. Luminaires with emergency battery packs connected to switched
circuits shall be controlled on and off by the controlling device and shall go into the
emergency mode upon loss of power to the emergency battery pack (provide switched
and unswitched leads to these luminaires).
3.2 T ESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Procedure for testing and commissioning shall be provided by

manufacturers/supplier. Manufacturer/supplier shall submit this procedure method
prior to delivery of fixtures/luminaries for consultants’ information and approval.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Static Uninterruptible Power Supply SECTION 16611
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 FACTORY TESTING .................................................................................................................. 1
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE ........................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 RATING INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 3
2.3 INPUT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 3
2.4 OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................................................... 3
2.5 DC BUS ................................................................................................................................. 4
2.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................................. 4
2.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ..................................................................................... 5
2.8 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 5
2.9 COMMUNICATION FEATURE ...................................................................................................... 7
2.10 BATTERY CABINETS................................................................................................................. 8
2.11 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (NOT USED) .................................................................................... 8
2.12 OPTIONAL ITEMS ..................................................................................................................... 9
PART 3 – EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 INSPECTION .......................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................ 11
3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING ........................................................................................................... 11
3.5 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT...................................................................................................... 11

CD\P06\Electrical\16611-Static Uninterruptible Power Supply.doc
SECTION 16611
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Static Uninterruptible Power Supply in accordance with the contract documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. PS
B. PEC (Latest Edition)
C. ANSI
D. IEC
E. IEEE
F. NEMA/NEC
G. UL
H. FCC
I. OSHA
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers product data sheets, electrical ratings, heat release data, physical
dimensions, noise ratings, and weights.
B. Factory test reports.
C. Field test reports.
D. Wiring/Control Diagrams
E. Operating and maintenance manual.
F. On site written test procedure.
1.4 FACTORY T ESTING
A. UPS system shall be tested as defined here for compliance with this Specification. Tests
described in this Section shall be performed at the UPS manufacturer’s facility and may
be witnessed by the Construction Manager.
B. All equipment, instruments, load banks, and apparatus for testing shall be provided by
the UPS manufacturer. All instruments shall be of sufficient accuracy to verify the
specified performance parameters.
C. All testing shall be performed at normal ambient conditions within the test facility.
D. System Tests: System tests shall be performed exclusive of the battery bank. The
system may be tested in increments, as long as it is demonstrated that each power

module performs as specified when operating with any other power module. Systems
with two power modules shall be tested with both power modules operational. Control
and power tests may be conducted simultaneously, if appropriate.
1. Control Tests - Operational of the following system items/functions shall be

tested:
a. Instrumentation:
1) Accuracy on display.
2) Operation upon command.
b. Annunciation:
1) Sensor operation.
2) Distinction between troubleshooting controls, normal status,
Priority 1 alarm, and Priority 2 alarm.
3) Status command.
4) Display operation normal alarms.
c. Logic:
1) Protective functions.
2) Normal operation functions.
d. Operator controls.
e. Troubleshooting controls.
2. Power Tests, Steady State: For the steady-state tests in this paragraph, all
three-phase voltages, all three-line currents, frequency, and power factor (or
kilowatts) shall be measured at the system input termination and the output
termination of the system and continuously recorded.
a. No load.
b. 50 percent of rated system kW load, balanced.
c. 100 percent rated system kW load, balanced.
3. Power Tests, Transient: For the transient tests in this paragraph, all voltages
shall be measured with continuous recording instruments at the output
termination of the system output/bypass module.
a. Zero to 50 percent load addition.

b. 50 to 100 percent load rejection.
c. Manually initiated transfer.
d. Manually initiated retransfer.
e. 125 percent of rated system load, balanced.
f. 150 percent of rated system load, balanced.
g. Automatic transfer.
h. Automatic retransfer.
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of UPS for 1 year from Date of Substantial
Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.2 RATING INFORMATION
The UPS shall have the following capacity, as indicated in the drawings.
2.3 INPUT REQUIREMENTS
A. Voltage: 400, 3 phase, 4 or 3 wire plus ground + 10%
B. Input Frequency: 60 Hz + 10%
C. Input Current: as required
D. Input Power Factor: Up to 98 lagging
E. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion:
An input filter shall be provided to limit input current harmonic distortion (THD) to less
than 10% THD and improve input power factor to 0.98.The input filter shall be mounted
inside the UPS cabinet.
F. Power Walk-in: 0 to 1 00% over a 1 0 second period.
2.4 OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
A. Voltage: 400 VAC, 3 ph, 4 wire plus Gnd (Output voltage adjustable + 3%)
B. Voltage Regulation:
+ 1.0% for 100% balanced load

+ 1.75% for 50% unbalanced load
+ 2.5% for 100% unbalanced load
C. Voltage Transient Response:
+ 6% for 1 00% step load change

+ 3% for 50% step load change
+ 1 % for loss or return of AC input power
+ 1 % for manual transfer at full load
D. Voltage Recovery Time: Return to within 1 % of nominal value within 16.67

milliseconds
E. Phase Angle Displacement:
1200 +10 for balanced load

1200 + 30 for 1 00% unbalanced load
F. Linear Load Capability: Output voltage total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be
maximum 2% and 1% for any single harmonic order when the UPS is connected to
100% linear loads.
G. Non-Linear Load Capability: Output voltage total harmonic distortion shall be less
than 3.5% when connected to a 1 00% non-linear load with a crest factor not to
exceed 3.5.

H. Frequency: 60 Hz + 2% synchronized with bypass (selectable in 1%, 1.5%, 3%, 4%

increments). 60 Hz + 0. 1 % free running.
1. Slew Rate: Set at 1 Hz/second maximum (selectable up to 2.0 Hz).
J. Power Factor: 0.8 at the rated volt-amperes (VA).
K. Overload Capability:
110% of rated load for 30 minutes

150% of rated load for 1 minute
210% of rated load for 1 seconds
L. Efficiency:
The UPS efficiency (AC to AC) with nominal input voltage and battery fully charged
under linear or non-linear loading shall be 91% at half load and 92% at full load.
2.5 DC BUS
A. VDC minimum: 238 VDC at 250C, 770F

VDC maximum 340 VDC at 250C, 770F
VDC Float: 325 VDC at 250C, 770F
B. Nominal DC Bus:
Temperature Rating: 770 F, 250 C
C. AC Ripple: <l% of DC voltage
D. Minimum Internal Battery Run Time: 15

At 0.8 pf (Full load/Half load)
E. Battery Protection:
1. Temperature Compensation: The UPS will include provisions for automatic

temperature compensation charging during the charging cycle. Between
30oC and 40oC ambient temperature inside the battery compartment, the
charger voltage will phase back to prevent overcharging of the battery in a
high temperature condition. Above 40oC the UPS will stop charging the
battery and alarm on a high battery temperature.
2. Deep Cycle Protection: The battery cutoff voltage will be automatically raised
during long discharges to extend battery life.
3. Long Outage Protection: The UPS will remain connected to the battery and
automatically restart the charger and UPS for outages less than 3 times the
full load battery time plus two hours. For longer outages the UPS will
shutdown to protect the battery and require a manual restart.
2.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Temperature:
Operating: Oo to 30oC
Up to 40oC for 8 hours
Non-Operating: -25oC to +70oC
B. Relative humidity (operating and storage): 0 to 95% non-condensation
C. Barometric Pressure:

Operating: Up to 3000 feet above sea level (up to 6000 feet with
ambient temperature less than 28oC)
Non-Operating: Up to 36,000 feet above sea level
D. Acoustical Noise: 55 dB "A" weighting at 3 feet
The UPS shall be designed to operate as an true-on-line reverse transfer system in

the following modes:
2.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND O PERATION
A. Normal
The inverter shall continuously supply power to the critical load. The rectifier/battery
charger shall derive power from the utility AC source and supply DC power to the
inverter while simultaneously float charging the battery.
B. Emergency
Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied by the
inverter, which, without any switching, shall obtain its power from the battery.
C. Recharge
Upon restoration of the utility AC power source (prior to complete battery discharge),
the rectifier/battery charger shall power the inverter and simultaneously recharge the
battery.
D. Bypass Mode
The static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the bypass
without interruption to the critical power load. This shall be accomplished by turning
the inverter off. Automatic retransfer or forward transfer of the load shall be
accomplished by turning the inverter on.
E. Maintenance Bypass/Test Mode
A manual make before break maintenance bypass switch shall be provided to isolate
the UPS inverter output and static bypass transfer switch for maintenance. This shall
allow the UPS to be tested or repaired without affecting load operation.
2.8 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Rectifier/Battery Charger
A six (6) pole, solid-state rectifier shall convert the incoming AC power to regulated
DC voltage, which shall be subsequently filtered to provide power for the battery
charging functions. The rectifier/battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to
support recharging of the battery. The rectifier/battery charger assembly shall be
constructed of modular design to facilitate maintenance.
1. Input Protection:
The rectifier/battery charger shall be protected by input fuses.

B. Inverter
The UPS output shall be derived from a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) IGBT inverter
design. The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified precise output power
characteristics (specified in paragraph 2.03) while operating over the battery voltage
range. The inverter assembly shall be constructed of modular rack out assemblies to

facilitate maintenance.
C. Static Bypass
The static bypass transfer switch shall be solid-state, rated for continuous duty and
shall operate under the following conditions:
1. Uninterrupted Transfer
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass source
to assume the critical load without interruption after the logic senses one of
the following conditions:
a. Inverter overload exceeds unit s rating

b. Battery protection period expired and bypass available
d. Inverter failure
2. Interrupted Transfer
If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated below, interrupted

transfer shall be (not less than 500 msec. in duration) made upon detection of
a fault condition.
a. Bypass voltage greater than + 10%, -10% from the UPS rated output
voltage.
b. Bypass frequency greater than + 2 Hz from the UPS rated output
frequency.
3. Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer, without
interruption, after the UPS inverter is turned "ON", after an instantaneous
overload-induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load current returns
to less than the unit's 100% rating.
4. Manual Transfer
A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the System Status and Control
Panel by turning the UPS inverter off.
5. Overload Ratings
The static bypass transfer switch shall have the following overload
characteristics:
a. 1000% of UPS output rating for 0.016 seconds (one cycle)

b. 130% of UPS output rating for 1 minute
c. 1 1 0% of UPS output rating for 1 0 minutes
d. 1 000% of UPS rating for 1 cycle
D. Input Filter
An input filter shall be included to limit input current harmonic distortion to less than
10%.
E. Microprocessor Controlled Logic
The full UPS operation shall be provided through the use of microprocessor
controlled logic. All operation and parameters are firmware controlled, thus
eliminating the need for manual adjustments or potentiometers. The logic shall
include a self-test and diagnostic circuitry such that a fault can be isolated down to

the printed circuit assembly or plug-in power assembly level. Every printed circuit
assembly or plug-in power assembly shall be monitored. Diagnostics shall be
performed via a PC through the local diagnostics port on the unit, or via a modem
through the RS232 communication port.
F. Standard Communication Panel
The UPS will include a standard easy to use communication panel. Included will be
visual and audible indicators for UPS On line, UPS fault, UPS on battery, and UPS off
line. The UPS communication panel will include fail safe UPS "ON" and UPS "OFF"
pushbuttons that will permit the user to safely command the UPS on or off without risk
of load loss.
1. The communication panel shall have as a minimum the following

indicators/alarms:
a. LED Green: Load on Inverter

b. LED Green: Bypass within limit
c. LED Yellow: Load on bypass
d. LED Red: Overload
e. LED Red: Battery Disconnected
f. LED Red: Discharging
g. LED Red: Low Battery
2. Audible Alarm Reset Touch Pad
Shall be used to silence the audible alarm. If a new alarm is sensed after the
original alarm has been silenced, it shall reactivate the audible alarm.
3. Emergency Power Off (EPO)
When EPO is pressed, it shall cause the AC input contactor bypass input
contactor and battery circuit breakers to open, thereby shutting down the UPS
and the load. The EPO function shall be capable of being initiated by an
externally provided N/C isolated dry contact (REPO).
G. Mechanical Design/Cable Entry
1. Enclosure
The UPS shall be housed in a free standing enclosure with dead front
construction. The UPS can accommodate both bottom and top entry cables.
2. Ventilation:
The UPS shall be designed for forced air cooling. Air inlets shall be provided
from the front bottom of the UPS enclosure. Air exhaust shall be from the top
rear portion of the unit. Air filters shall be provided as standard.
2.9 COMMUNICATION FEATURE
A. Standard Communication Panel:
The UPS will include a standard easy to use communication panel. Included will be
both visual LCD and audible indicators. The UPS communication panel will include
fail safe UPS "ON" and UPS "OFF" pushbuttons that will permit the user to safely
command the UPS without risk of load loss. A local Emergency Power Off (EPO) will
be provided to turn the UPS off and isolate it from incoming and battery power. An
alphanumeric display will be included for indication of UPS alarms and metering
information advanced operational features.

The display system operations and parameters.
1. System Parameters Monitored
The visual display will display the following system parameters based on true
RMS metering:
 Input voltage
 Bypass voltage
 Bypass input frequency
 UPS output voltage (3 phase simultaneously)
 UPS output current (3 phase simultaneously)
 UPS output frequency
 UPS output % load
 UPS output KVA
 DC voltage
 Time remaining on battery and available battery time.
B. DB-9 Connector: One DB-9 connector will be provided for field diagnostics.
C. Dry Contacts:
Four (4) isolated dry contacts shall be available for external connection on a DB-1 5
connector provided on the rear panel. Contacts available include:
 UPS on Line
 Load on Bypass
 UPS on Battery
 UPS Battery Low
The contacts will be normally open and will change state to indicate the operating
status. The contacts will be rated 1 00 milliamp at 24 VDC.
2.10 BATTERY CABINETS
The battery cabinets shall be a matching and available in both adjacent or stand alone
versions. All power wiring and control cables for adjacent versions will be included for
adjacent models.
Battery disconnect shall be provided.
A. Battery Type: Sealed maintenance free high rate discharge, lead acid cells
B. Minimum End Volts Per Cell: 1.67
2.11 DRY TYPE T RANSFORMERS (NOT USED)
The transformer shall be energy efficient dry type transformer of two winding type, self cooled,
capacity as required, [3], [4W], [400-400V], 60HZ. Transformer shall be manufactured by
GE, Cutter Hammer or Approved equal.
Transformer shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable
ANSI, NEMA, IEEE. Standards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory and bear the UL
Label.
Transformer shall be insulated with 1500C insulation system and shall be capable of carrying
a continuous 30% overload. Required performance must be obtained without exceeding the
above rise in a 400C maximum, 300C average ambient temperature.

All insulation materials shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined
in ASTM Standard Test Method D635.
2.12 OPTIONAL ITEMS
A. Two communication slots shall be provided for customer use. The communication
port options are listed as follows:
1. RS232 (U-Talk). Active RS 232 with U-Talk protocol for remote monitoring
and file server shutdown for most popular file servers and operating systems
shall be provided. Includes one communication board, software and
communication cable. Requires one communication slot.
2. SNMP communication. Includes UM link (SNMP communication translator),
communication card, and wiring. Requires one communication slot.
3. Contact Five Board. Five (5) dry contacts (rated 120 volts @ 1 amps) on a
terminal block. Includes one communication board. Requires one
communication slot. Five Form-C contacts include:
 UPS on Line
 Load on Bypass
 UPS on Battery
 UPS Battery Low
 Summary Alarm
4. RS232 (J-Bus). Remote communication Link, require one communication

slot: The RS 232 communication port will be available for communication for
external monitoring system.
5. Remote Alarm Status Panel
a. A wall mounted panel with indicating LED'S:
UPS on line
Load on bypass
UPS on battery
Summary alarm
Battery shut down imminent
The alarms shall be a latching type, such that if an alarm is triggered,

the LED will stay ON (latch) even if the alarm is corrected. This
feature will provide the operator the chance to verify the occurrence
of the alarm.
b. The Remote Alarm Status Panel shall also be equipped with:
 ALARM RESET push-button (White LED), to reset the latching

alarm
 HORN for alarm annunciation
 HORN RESET push-button (White LED), to silence the audible
alarm
6. Remote Monitor Plus Remote Communication Panel:
The Monitor Plus system status and control panel will be available locally or
remotely to control, monitor and display system operations and parameters.
The display will be
available in English, Requires 1 communication slots.
a. System Parameters Monitored
The visual display will display the following system parameters based
on true RMS metering:
 Input voltage
 Bypass voltage
 Bypass input frequency
 UPS output voltage (3 phase simultaneously)
 UPS output current/phase (3 phase simultaneously)
 UPS output frequency
 UPS output % load
 UPS output kVA
 DC voltage
 Time remaining on battery and available battery time.
b. Audible Alarm Reset Touch Pad
Will be used to silence the audible alarm. If a new alarm is sensed

after the original alarm has been silenced, it will reactivate the audible
alarm.
7. Teleservice:
Teleservice, which is a twenty-four hour-per-day seven day-per-week remote

UPS monitoring and reporting service shall be provided. Teleservice uses
standard analog telephone lines (via modem) as the communication medium
to transmit critical UPS data back to a Central Station. In addition, the
Central Station will communicate with each of the subscribing UPSs on a
routine basis to check equipment status, operating conditions and all
measured values. The Teleservice Central Station will receive notification
about UPS anomalies and equipment status. Each UPSs reported anomalies
and all routine interrogation data will be accumulated for utilization in
generating a quarterly customer report. (Requires one communication slot)
B. Distribution Panel Boards
Optional distribution panel boards will be provided with the UPS in a 42" wide cabinet.
The panel board will be a Square D, NQO panel compatible with bait on or plug in
breakers, with 10-100 amp trips. Panelboards will accommodate any combination of
one, two or three pole breakers; up to 42 poles per panel board. Refer to Panelboard
Schedule the configuration of the Panelboards.
C. Two (2) circuit breaker external maintenance bypass. Requires contact -5 board
The maintenance bypass option provides for two (2) additional circuit breakers
mounted inside a wall mounted enclosure for total UPS isolation and UPS
maintenance. Maintenance bypass transfers shall be without interruption and kirk-
key interlocked to protect the UPS from damage in the event of out of sequence
transfers.
D. An external wall mounted battery disconnect shall be provided to isolate the battery
from the UPS system for maintenance
E. Seismic Zone 4 brackets shall be available for the UPS cabinet and matching
auxiliary batteries cabinets.
F. Dual cable input shall be provided.

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which UPS is to be installed and notify Architect
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install complete UPS System, including associated control devices as indicated, in

accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, requirements of applicable
standards, and in accordance with local authority requirements to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of UPS System with
other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to floors. To ensure enclosures are permanently

and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper
mounting.
E. UPS shall be mounted on double neoprene pad isolators.
F. Provide equipment earthing (grounding) connections for UPS System as required.
A. Upon completion of installation and after circuity has been energized, demonstrate
capability and compliance of UPS Systems with requirements. Where possible,
correct malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate compliance, otherwise,
remove and replace with new units, and retest.
B. Provide site testing by the manufacturer’s field service personnel or representative.

Site testing to consist of a complete test of the UPS Systems under load and the
associated accessories supplied by the manufacturer. Document the test results, sign
and date for Architect.
3.4 PERSONNEL T RAINING
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner and operator’s building

personnel in procedures for starting up, bypassing and operating UPS System.
Furnish operator’s manuals providing installation and operation instructions for each
UPS System.
3.5 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
A. Emergency Breakdown
1. The maximum delay in answering an emergency call (the time between

receiving the first call giving the full details of the fault and the arrival of an
engineer on the site) is fixed at two (2) hours in Metro Manila.
2. The Contractor shall provide a twenty four (24) hours, seven days a week
service for emergency breakdown calls i.e.unexpected and unintentional
shutdown or malfunctioning of the equipment.
3. The Contractor shall agree to provide the labor, parts and necessary tools
and testing instruments needed to repair the unit.

4. All defective components replaced during the contract period will remain the
property of Owner.
B. Preventive Maintenance Check-up
1. The Contractor shall make its services available FOUR (4) times a year for
preventive maintenance check-up which shall be scheduled once every
THREE (3) months.
2. The following shall be included in the Contractors Scope of Work:
 Shut-down of the unit
- inspection of surrounding environment and measurement of UPS

room temperature
 Mechanical check on the unit.
- tightness of screws, connections, etc

- check welded and soldered joints
- visual inspection of all UPS parts and components for possible early
breakdown
- cleaning and clearing of dust on all UPS parts
- check-up all cooling fans for all bearing noise
 Check-up on Battery charger/Rectifier
- calibration of battery float and charge voltage

- testing of battery charger electrolytic capacitors
 Check-up on Battery
- tightness of each individual battery terminal

- measurement and recording of battery float voltage
- cleaning of battery and battery racks from corrosion
- measurement and recording of individual battery voltage
- perform equalized charging for lead acid battery type.
 Check-up on Inverter Unit
- measurement and recording of output voltage, output load current,

output frequency
- check on different parameters and calibration, if necessary
 Performance test
- simulation of power failure to test system on battery

- simulation of inverter failure to test static switch to transfer the load
without interruption to commercial power or Meralco line
- simulate battery breakdown to test UPS response in transferring load
to Meralco line without interruption.
 Preparation of report
- Customer will be provided a copy of report regarding the

maintenance.
- The Contractor shall maintain a complete list of reports and
intervention to update field engineers on the history of customer unit.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Testing and Commissioning SECTION 16950
PART 1 – GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 SCOPE OF W ORK ................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TESTING, SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................... 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.4 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................... 5
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 5
PART 3 – EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 5

3.1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND VERIFICATION .................................................................................. 5
3.2 BUILDING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM............................................................................................. 6
3.3 SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................ 6
3.4 COMMISSIONING .................................................................................................................... 7

SECTION 16950
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide any materials, equipment and labor required and make such tests as specified
in the various Electrical Power and Lighting Systems and Communication Systems as
specified herein and as otherwise deemed necessary to show proper execution of the
work in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.
B. Any defect or deficiencies discovered as a result of such tests shall be corrected

without additional cost to the Owner.
C. After the installation is completed and properly adjusted, operating tests shall be
conducted. The various equipment and systems shall be demonstrated to operate in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests shall be
performed in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. Provide electric power,
instruments and personnel necessary for performing the various tests.
D. Procedures and tests outlined below are to be considered as in addition to normal

visual and mechanical inspections which must be carried out prior to balancing
equipment in service.
E. Procedures and tests outlined below are to be considered in addition to tests called for
under other sections of the electrical specifications.
F. Perform the following tests in the presence of the Architect/Engineer:
1. Voltage test shall be made at the last outlet on each circuit when the circuit is
carrying load current. If drop in potential is excessive, correct the condition and
re-test the relevant circuit.
2. All cables, after being pulled in place and before being connected, shall be tested
by Megger test to determine that conductor insulation resistance is not less than
that recommended by cable manufacturer. Four copies of all test shall be
furnished to the Architect. All cable failing insulation test shall be removed,
replaced and re-tested.
3. All equipment shall pass similar tests and entire system tested after all final
connections have been made.
4. All motors shall be tested under load with ammeter readings taken in each phase
and the RPM of motors recorded at the time. All motors shall be tested for
correct direction of rotation.
G. Perform Injection Testing to all over current and ground fault protective devices. Also,
any shunt trip shall be tested.
1.2 T ESTING, SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The following relevant tests shall be conducted at the factory and witnessed by the
Architect or his representative for all custom built, electrical plant and equipment such
as Main Low Voltage Switchgear Transformers, Automatic Transfer Switches and
Diesel Generator Sets:
1. Earthing/Gounding facilities

CD\P06\Electrical\16950-Testing and Commissioning.doc
2. Insulation resistance
3. Phasing and wiring check
4. Operational checks of all circuit breakers, isolators, starters and switches.
5. Check major component type and sizes.
6. Pressure test to electrical equipment (as recommended by the manufacturers).
B. The contractor shall take every precaution possible to assure the proper functioning of
equipment or systems and shall adhere to the following procedures.
1. Electrical equipment delivered to job-site during construction shall be protected

in such a way that will prevent dirt, dust, water or any other foreign materials
from entering or contaminating the working parts. This protection shall also be
provided after installation as long as construction operations continue.
2. Before any equipment or system is energized, the following procedures and

tests should be followed and/or performed.
a. Clean all dirt, dust and moisture from equipment.
b. Check for loose bus and cable connections.
c. Check for missing insulation in equipment and on conductors.
d. Check for any modifications, alterations or the use of unapproved parts

in the assembly of the equipment against the approved submittals.
e. Ascertain that all circuit breaker short circuit interrupting ratings are
adequate.
f. The equipment room or area should be free of moisture

accumulations.
g. Check conductors run in multiple to ensure that they are properly

phased.
h. Conduct a “megger” test of all equipment and wiring (the use of battery
operated test lights and bells is not acceptable for this test).
i. Conduct point to point check for all the sub-main and final circuits to
ensure correct cable termination.
j. Check all measuring instrument.
k. Check all the single line diagrams are mounted near the main switch
panel within the switch room, within distribution panel, etc.
l. Check all the circuit labeling and danger sign are provided where
necessary and appropriate.
C. For maximum safety on feeder of 200 amperes and greater, it is recommended that a
low amperage test fuse (15 amperes or less be used and the circuit be energized
without load to ensure the safe interruption of the circuit if a fault exists. Under no
circumstances shall a wire or open link be use as a substitute for approved enclosed
fuse.
D. Ascertain that all equipment is rated for the available fault current.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a detailed short circuit and coordination study of the electrical system including
the incoming Plug-in Bus Duct breaker and Feeder Cables to Sub-Switchboards and
Distribution Boards.
B. The study result shall be submitted for review in the following form:
1. For the short circuit study, five (5) bound copies of the computer printout together
with five (5) prints of the device location diagrams.
2. For the device coordination study, five (5) bound copies of the time current
curves, together with a tabulation of relay identification, location and
recommended settings. A commentary covering the basis for selection of
settings and suggestions for improvement of coordination and protection shall be
included where applicable.
C. A short circuit study and protective device coordination study shall be performed as
described herein.
D. A short circuit study shall determine the maximum duty that the system protective
devices, transformers and interconnections will be subjected to in the event of three
phase and/or line-to-ground fault conditions. The fault study shall also provide the
basic information required for determining protective relay settings.
1. The study be a tabulation of symmetrical RMS short circuit values for both
interrupting duty and momentary duty. Resistance and reactance components
of total impedance to the point of fault, the X/R ratios and voltages one and two
busses remote from the fault shall be given. All values shall be printed in per
unit form or kilo amperes. A fault shall be assumed at each of the bus
locations and the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual contributions
from each connected branch shall be indicated.
2. In addition to the above, the study shall include listings of all branch and source
impedances. Branch and bus identification numbers shall be pre-assigned and
identified on an accompanying system diagram.
3. Individual switching operations shall be performed during the course of the

study to simulate opening or closing of tie circuit or the addition of generation or
other short circuit sources as applicable.
E. The coordination study shall include the necessary calculations and logic decisions to
select or to check the selection of power circuit breaker ratings, phase and ground over-
current relay characteristics and settings and the ratios of associated instrument
transformers. The objective of the study is to provide the optimum protective and
coordination performance or these devices.
1. Feeders and motor control centre.
2. The coordination study may be performed manually or by digital computer or

combination of the two procedures.
F. The results of the study shall be presented graphically on time-current coordination

curves. These curves shall illustrate the selected trip characteristics of the protective
devices in series to the fault location and show the degree of protection attained from
transformers, motor, etc. as selective tripping obtained from the backup protective
devices.
G. The results of the study shall also be presented as data tabulations under the following
heading where applicable:

1. Short Circuit Data:
Current values for maximum and minimum fault conditions for close-in and line-
end fault locations for each protective device.
A comparative tabulation of the calculated short circuit duties versus the ratings
of the applied circuit breakers and fuses. If the study reveals problem areas or
inadequacies of protective device, the report shall include recommendations for
corrective steps to be taken.
2. Devices Identification and Settings:
A listing of relay types and available taps, current transformer ratios, breaker
types, fuse ratings and the location of each device in the system.
The recommended tap and time dial setting and the instantaneous pickup
setting is to be given for each over current relay and setting for each breaker.
A critique of the applied devices shall be included with comments pertaining to

the suitability of the selected types, ranges and CT ratios, etc.
3. Device Operation Check:
For faults at each bus location, the operation time in second shall be listed for
each relay at the fault bus one and two buses away from the fault bus.
H. The contractor shall obtain the following data where applicable from the switchgear
manufacturer, utility company and/or other Sub-Contractor to enable him to proceed
with the short circuit and coordination study. (Data to be obtained unless otherwise
noted from contract document and/or manufacturer furnished equipment for the
project).
1. Single line interconnection diagram.
2. Short circuit contribution from power company source and X/R ratio of this
contribution.
3. Impedance, voltage ratio, MVA rating and method of neutral earthing of power
transformers.
4. The ohmic reactance value of current limiting reactors.
5. The ratings of all induction motors. Rating of motors should include full load
amperes, voltage, speed and sub-transient reactance.
6. Type voltage rating, size and number of conductors, type of conduits, shielding
and lengths of all interconnecting cable.
7. Identification of circuit breakers and power fuses to include manufacturer and

type, voltage rating, interrupting and momentary short circuit ratings and rated
interrupting time.
8. Indication of which tie breakers or switches are normally closed or cannot be

closed for certain reasons.
9. The ratio of the instrument transformers energizing each relay.

10. The type designation, range of adjustments, style or catalogue number and the
manufacturer of each protection relay. The existing settings on each relay
should be included if applicable.
1.4 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS
A. Safety practices shall be included but are not limited to the following requirements:
1. Local Authority and Insurance Company’s Standards/Requirements.
2. Applicable National and Local Safety operating procedures.
3. Owner’s safety practices.
B. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise
specifically required herein.
C. Power circuits shall have conductors shortened to earth by a hot line earthing device
approved for the purpose.
D. In all cases, work shall not proceed until it has been determined that it is safe to do so.
E. The Contractor shall have available, sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to
conduct specified tests safety.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
3.1 T ESTING, ADJUSTING AND VERIFICATION
A. Provide necessary material, labour and miscellaneous services for temporary feeders,
provision of jumpers and connections, and handling equipment during the testing,
adjusting and verification procedure.
B. Confirm that all protective device schemes function properly. Conduct circuit breaker
trip test. Apply correct voltage and current to protective device.
C. Provide cross wattmeter readings equivalent or any differential and or directional relay
schemes. Verify metering schemes.
D. During the testing and verification procedure, conduct spot checks on selected
protective devices with representative of the Owner and/or Engineer to adjust and to re-
test prospective devices to those final settings will result in performance in accordance
with approved issue of respective coordination curve.
E. Witness tests shall occur in locations to be determined once manufacturers have been
agreed with the successful electrical sub-contract tenderer.
F. Provide factory witness testing to suit delivery schedule of manufacturers. Provide

hourly rates etc. to re-witness equipment if an initial test fails.
G. Provide all submission and final report as previously specified.
H. The final report and study shall include assurance for the following items:

1. That the protective devices on the main low voltage equipment is coordinated
with the Utility Company protective devices.
2. That the protective devices within the parameters of the study conform to the
results of the study.
3. That the equipment has been tested and performs as per the settings of
approved coordination curves.
4. That the “as left” condition of the protective device correspond to the record
documents.
Complete studies and reports shall be submitted simultaneously to the Engineer as well
as part of the requirement of the Project Record Document.
3.2 BUILDING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. Before energizing any portion of the electrical systems, perform megger tests on all
feeders. Result to conform to the applicable Codes and Standards to the satisfaction of
the authorized inspection authority and to the Electrical Engineer.
B. Upon completion of the building and immediately prior to final inspection and takeover
check the load balance on all feeders at distribution centers, motor control and panel
boards. Tests to be carried out by turning on all possible loads in the building and
checking load current balance. If load imbalance exceeds 10 percent, reconnect circuit
to balance load.
C. Make voltage checks throughout building after building is in operation for sixty (60) days
and at this time. If directed by the Electrical Engineer, adjust transformer tap settings.
Readings taken at this time to be logged, tabulated and any adjustments made to be
suitably logged and incorporated in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
D. All protective devices to be tested and calibrated on site prior to energizing to ensure
proper operation as calculated on coordination studies provided by equipment
suppliers. Testing and calibration to consist of verification of published curves and
setting of devices at specified settings. Complete report to be submitted to the
Electrical Engineer within seven (7) days of completion of testing.
3.3 SYSTEM
The following systems and equipment are to be tested, inspected and certified.
A. Wire and Cable (600 Volts and Below):
1. Inspect all splices and terminations and make mechanically and electrically
tight transformer tap settings. Readings taken at this time to be logged,
tabulated and any adjustments made to be suitably logged and incorporated
in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
2. Perform standard insulation test with “megger” tester for all conductors. Test
shall show insulation resistance in excess of minimum values required by
Codes. Submit certification to the Architect/Engineer. All megger tests for
power cables shall be carried out with a 1000V tester.
B. Motor Controllers:
1. Submit with certification in tabular form a complete listing of all motors on the
project for which motor controllers have been provided. Include on this

listing, the nameplate full load amperes of each motor and the size overload
heaters installation each motor controller.
C. Motors:
1. Test all motors under load and confirm that motor rotation is correct.
D. Earthing
1. Upon completion of the electrical earthing system, the contractor shall test
the earthing system for stray currents, earths, shorts, etc. These tests shall
be performed with approved instruments.
E. Auxiliary Systems
1. Refer to the auxiliary system sections on the details of Testing.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all the previously
described elements which comprise the whole installation.
B. In addition, the Contractor shall carry out final settings and adjustments and
commissioning of the whole installation up to including the incoming circuit breakers
of the main low voltage switchboards in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and recognized practice.
C. Details of proposed commissioning procedures shall accompany the Contractor’s

proposal Submission.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible in carrying out point by point check on all
electrical equipment to be monitored by BMS / FMS System to ensure that equipment
to be status monitored is satisfactorily monitored.
END OF SECTION


P06 03 ELEC - Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P06 03 ELEC - Compressed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P06 03 ELEC - Compressed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHILIPPINE GENERAL HOSPITAL

VARIOUS PROJECTS – P06

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

Prepared by: MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES, INC.

Reg. No. : 2633

1. Section 16001 - Electrical Systems

2. Section 16007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers

3. Section 16010 - Electrical General Provisions

4. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

5. Section 16051 - Common Works Results for Electrical

6. Section 16055 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination

7. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding

8. Section 16071 - Fire Stopping for Electrical Works

9. Section 16074 - Electrical Equipment Noise Control,

10. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification

11. Section 16080 - Startup, Testing, and Commissioning of

12. Section 16110 - Raceways and Boxes

13. Section 16120 - 600V Wire and Cable

14. Section 16135 - Isolated Power Systems

15. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices

16. Section 16200 - Engine Generator Sets

17. Section 16211 - Electricity Metering

18. Section 16330 - Dry Type (Cast Resin) Power Transformer

19. Section 16410 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect

20. Section 16443 - Motor Control Center

21. Section 16470 - Panelboards

22. Section 16500 - Luminaires and Accessories

23. Section 16611 - Static UPS

24. Section 16950 - Testing and Commissioning

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................1

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

1. Furnish, Install, Test and Commission all the High Voltage

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 3

1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED

B. Civil works consisting of concrete pads of substation transformers, switchboards,

C. Elevators, control equipment and accessories, except where specifically noted

F. Power and control wiring from motor breaker-starters to motors.

G. Motor Control Centers (MCC).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to the General Provisions.

1.4 CERTIFICATION AND APPROVALS

1.6 MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Only new materials and devices shall be installed on the job.

1.7 GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Coordination of all sub-contractors is the responsibility of the General Contractor; work

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 2 of 3

1.8 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The more stringent requirement shall prevail.

1.9 AS-BUILT PLANS

1.10 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

A. Shall be conditioned on a successful test of the entire system.

1.11 INSPECTION AND TESTING

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 3 of 3

PART 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION

Spec. Materials/ Base Bid Alternative Mfg.

16060 Grounding and Bonding Cadweld